Linux v2.6.13

Bugfix (usage of uninitialized pointer in zfcp_port_dequeue) and compile
fixes for the zfcp device driver.

Signed-off-by: Heiko Carstens <heiko.carstens@de.ibm.com>
Acked-by: James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@steeleye.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@osdl.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@osdl.org>

CREDITS

@@ -1624,10 +1624,10 @@ E: ajoshi@shell.unixbox.com
 D: fbdev hacking
 
 N: Jesper Juhl
-E: juhl-lkml@dif.dk
-D: Various small janitor fixes, cleanups etc.
+E: jesper.juhl@gmail.com
+D: Various fixes, cleanups and minor features.
 S: Lemnosvej 1, 3.tv
-S: 2300 Copenhagen S
+S: 2300 Copenhagen S.
 S: Denmark
 
 N: Jozsef Kadlecsik
@@ -1880,6 +1880,13 @@ S: Schlehenweg 9
 S: D-91080 Uttenreuth
 S: Germany
 
+N: Jaya Kumar
+E: jayalk@intworks.biz
+W: http://www.intworks.biz
+D: Arc monochrome LCD framebuffer driver, x86 reboot fixups
+S: Gurgaon, India
+S: Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
+
 N: Gabor Kuti
 M: seasons@falcon.sch.bme.hu
 M: seasons@makosteszta.sote.hu
@@ -2373,9 +2380,10 @@ E: tmolina@cablespeed.com
 D: bug fixes, documentation, minor hackery
 
 N: James Morris
-E: jmorris@intercode.com.au
-W: http://www.intercode.com.au/jmorris/
-D: Netfilter, Linux Security Modules (LSM).
+E: jmorris@namei.org
+W: http://namei.org/
+D: Netfilter, Linux Security Modules (LSM), SELinux, IPSec,
+D: Crypto API, general networking, miscellaneous.
 S: PO Box 707
 S: Spit Junction NSW 2088
 S: Australia
@@ -2415,8 +2423,7 @@ S: Toronto, Ontario
 S: Canada
 
 N: Zwane Mwaikambo
-E: zwane@linuxpower.ca
-W: http://function.linuxpower.ca
+E: zwane@arm.linux.org.uk
 D: Various driver hacking
 D: Lowlevel x86 kernel hacking
 D: General debugging

Documentation/00-INDEX

@@ -138,6 +138,8 @@ java.txt
 	- info on the in-kernel binary support for Java(tm).
 kbuild/
 	- directory with info about the kernel build process.
+kdumpt.txt
+       - mini HowTo on getting the crash dump code to work.
 kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
 	- mini HowTo on generation and location of kernel documentation files.
 kernel-docs.txt

Documentation/Changes

@@ -44,9 +44,9 @@ running, the suggested command should tell you.
 
 Again, keep in mind that this list assumes you are already
 functionally running a Linux 2.4 kernel.  Also, not all tools are
-necessary on all systems; obviously, if you don't have any PCMCIA (PC
-Card) hardware, for example, you probably needn't concern yourself
-with pcmcia-cs.
+necessary on all systems; obviously, if you don't have any ISDN
+hardware, for example, you probably needn't concern yourself with
+isdn4k-utils.
 
 o  Gnu C                  2.95.3                  # gcc --version
 o  Gnu make               3.79.1                  # make --version
@@ -57,13 +57,15 @@ o  e2fsprogs              1.29                    # tune2fs
 o  jfsutils               1.1.3                   # fsck.jfs -V
 o  reiserfsprogs          3.6.3                   # reiserfsck -V 2>&1|grep reiserfsprogs
 o  xfsprogs               2.6.0                   # xfs_db -V
+o  pcmciautils            004
 o  pcmcia-cs              3.1.21                  # cardmgr -V
 o  quota-tools            3.09                    # quota -V
 o  PPP                    2.4.0                   # pppd --version
 o  isdn4k-utils           3.1pre1                 # isdnctrl 2>&1|grep version
 o  nfs-utils              1.0.5                   # showmount --version
 o  procps                 3.2.0                   # ps --version
-o  oprofile               0.5.3                   # oprofiled --version
+o  oprofile               0.9                     # oprofiled --version
+o  udev                   058                     # udevinfo -V
 
 Kernel compilation
 ==================
@@ -186,13 +188,20 @@ architecture independent and any version from 2.0.0 onward should
 work correctly with this version of the XFS kernel code (2.6.0 or
 later is recommended, due to some significant improvements).
 
+PCMCIAutils
+-----------
+
+PCMCIAutils replaces pcmcia-cs (see below). It properly sets up
+PCMCIA sockets at system startup and loads the appropriate modules
+for 16-bit PCMCIA devices if the kernel is modularized and the hotplug
+subsystem is used.
 
 Pcmcia-cs
 ---------
 
 PCMCIA (PC Card) support is now partially implemented in the main
-kernel source.  Pay attention when you recompile your kernel ;-).
-Also, be sure to upgrade to the latest pcmcia-cs release.
+kernel source. The "pcmciautils" package (see above) replaces pcmcia-cs
+for newest kernels.
 
 Quota-tools
 -----------
@@ -349,9 +358,13 @@ Xfsprogs
 --------
 o  <ftp://oss.sgi.com/projects/xfs/download/>
 
+Pcmciautils
+-----------
+o  <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/pcmcia/>
+
 Pcmcia-cs
 ---------
-o  <ftp://pcmcia-cs.sourceforge.net/pub/pcmcia-cs/pcmcia-cs-3.1.21.tar.gz>
+o  <http://pcmcia-cs.sourceforge.net/>
 
 Quota-tools
 ----------

Documentation/DocBook/Makefile

@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 
 DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \
 	    kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \
-	    procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml scsidrivers.xml \
+	    procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml \
 	    sis900.xml kernel-api.xml journal-api.xml lsm.xml usb.xml \
 	    gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml
 
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ installmandocs: mandocs
 KERNELDOC = scripts/kernel-doc
 DOCPROC   = scripts/basic/docproc
 
-XMLTOFLAGS = -m Documentation/DocBook/stylesheet.xsl
+XMLTOFLAGS = -m $(srctree)/Documentation/DocBook/stylesheet.xsl
 #XMLTOFLAGS += --skip-validation
 
 ###

Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl

@@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ X!Ekernel/module.c
   <chapter id="hardware">
      <title>Hardware Interfaces</title>
      <sect1><title>Interrupt Handling</title>
-!Iarch/i386/kernel/irq.c
+!Ikernel/irq/manage.c
      </sect1>
 
      <sect1><title>Resources Management</title>
@@ -338,7 +338,6 @@ X!Earch/i386/kernel/mca.c
 X!Iinclude/linux/device.h
 -->
 !Edrivers/base/driver.c
-!Edrivers/base/class_simple.c
 !Edrivers/base/core.c
 !Edrivers/base/firmware_class.c
 !Edrivers/base/transport_class.c

Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl

@@ -84,6 +84,14 @@ void (*port_disable) (struct ata_port *);
 	Called from ata_bus_probe() and ata_bus_reset() error paths,
 	as well as when unregistering from the SCSI module (rmmod, hot
 	unplug).
+	This function should do whatever needs to be done to take the
+	port out of use.  In most cases, ata_port_disable() can be used
+	as this hook.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Called from ata_bus_probe() on a failed probe.
+	Called from ata_bus_reset() on a failed bus reset.
+	Called from ata_scsi_release().
 	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
@@ -98,6 +106,13 @@ void (*dev_config) (struct ata_port *, struct ata_device *);
 	found.  Typically used to apply device-specific fixups prior to
 	issue of SET FEATURES - XFER MODE, and prior to operation.
 	</para>
+	<para>
+	Called by ata_device_add() after ata_dev_identify() determines
+	a device is present.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	This entry may be specified as NULL in ata_port_operations.
+	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
 
@@ -135,6 +150,8 @@ void (*tf_read) (struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
 	registers / DMA buffers.  ->tf_read() is called to read the
 	hardware registers / DMA buffers, to obtain the current set of
 	taskfile register values.
+	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware (PIO or MMIO) use
+	ata_tf_load() and ata_tf_read() for these hooks.
 	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
@@ -147,6 +164,8 @@ void (*exec_command)(struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
 	<para>
 	causes an ATA command, previously loaded with
 	->tf_load(), to be initiated in hardware.
+	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware use ata_exec_command()
+	for this hook.
 	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
@@ -161,6 +180,10 @@ Allow low-level driver to filter ATA PACKET commands, returning a status
 indicating whether or not it is OK to use DMA for the supplied PACKET
 command.
 	</para>
+	<para>
+	This hook may be specified as NULL, in which case libata will
+	assume that atapi dma can be supported.
+	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
 
@@ -175,6 +198,14 @@ u8   (*check_err)(struct ata_port *ap);
 	Reads the Status/AltStatus/Error ATA shadow register from
 	hardware.  On some hardware, reading the Status register has
 	the side effect of clearing the interrupt condition.
+	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware use
+	ata_check_status() for this hook.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Note that because this is called from ata_device_add(), at
+	least a dummy function that clears device interrupts must be
+	provided for all drivers, even if the controller doesn't
+	actually have a taskfile status register.
 	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
@@ -188,7 +219,13 @@ void (*dev_select)(struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int device);
 	Issues the low-level hardware command(s) that causes one of N
 	hardware devices to be considered 'selected' (active and
 	available for use) on the ATA bus.  This generally has no
-meaning on FIS-based devices.
+	meaning on FIS-based devices.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware use
+	ata_std_dev_select() for this hook.  Controllers which do not
+	support second drives on a port (such as SATA contollers) will
+	use ata_noop_dev_select().
 	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
@@ -204,6 +241,8 @@ void (*phy_reset) (struct ata_port *ap);
 	for device presence (PATA and SATA), typically a soft reset
 	(SRST) will be performed.  Drivers typically use the helper
 	functions ata_bus_reset() or sata_phy_reset() for this hook.
+	Many SATA drivers use sata_phy_reset() or call it from within
+	their own phy_reset() functions.
 	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
@@ -227,6 +266,25 @@ PCI IDE DMA Status register.
 These hooks are typically either no-ops, or simply not implemented, in
 FIS-based drivers.
 	</para>
+	<para>
+Most legacy IDE drivers use ata_bmdma_setup() for the bmdma_setup()
+hook.  ata_bmdma_setup() will write the pointer to the PRD table to
+the IDE PRD Table Address register, enable DMA in the DMA Command
+register, and call exec_command() to begin the transfer.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+Most legacy IDE drivers use ata_bmdma_start() for the bmdma_start()
+hook.  ata_bmdma_start() will write the ATA_DMA_START flag to the DMA
+Command register.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+Many legacy IDE drivers use ata_bmdma_stop() for the bmdma_stop()
+hook.  ata_bmdma_stop() clears the ATA_DMA_START flag in the DMA
+command register.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+Many legacy IDE drivers use ata_bmdma_status() as the bmdma_status() hook.
+	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
 
@@ -250,6 +308,10 @@ int (*qc_issue) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc);
 	helper function ata_qc_issue_prot() for taskfile protocol-based
 	dispatch.  More advanced drivers implement their own ->qc_issue.
 	</para>
+	<para>
+	ata_qc_issue_prot() calls ->tf_load(), ->bmdma_setup(), and
+	->bmdma_start() as necessary to initiate a transfer.
+	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
 
@@ -279,6 +341,21 @@ void (*irq_clear) (struct ata_port *);
 	before the interrupt handler is registered, to be sure hardware
 	is quiet.
 	</para>
+	<para>
+	The second argument, dev_instance, should be cast to a pointer
+	to struct ata_host_set.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Most legacy IDE drivers use ata_interrupt() for the
+	irq_handler hook, which scans all ports in the host_set,
+	determines which queued command was active (if any), and calls
+	ata_host_intr(ap,qc).
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Most legacy IDE drivers use ata_bmdma_irq_clear() for the
+	irq_clear() hook, which simply clears the interrupt and error
+	flags in the DMA status register.
+	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
 
@@ -292,6 +369,7 @@ void (*scr_write) (struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int sc_reg,
 	<para>
 	Read and write standard SATA phy registers.  Currently only used
 	if ->phy_reset hook called the sata_phy_reset() helper function.
+	sc_reg is one of SCR_STATUS, SCR_CONTROL, SCR_ERROR, or SCR_ACTIVE.
 	</para>
 
 	</sect2>
@@ -307,17 +385,29 @@ void (*host_stop) (struct ata_host_set *host_set);
 	->port_start() is called just after the data structures for each
 	port are initialized.  Typically this is used to alloc per-port
 	DMA buffers / tables / rings, enable DMA engines, and similar
-	tasks.  
+	tasks.  Some drivers also use this entry point as a chance to
+	allocate driver-private memory for ap->private_data.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Many drivers use ata_port_start() as this hook or call
+	it from their own port_start() hooks.  ata_port_start()
+	allocates space for a legacy IDE PRD table and returns.
 	</para>
 	<para>
 	->port_stop() is called after ->host_stop().  It's sole function
 	is to release DMA/memory resources, now that they are no longer
-	actively being used.
+	actively being used.  Many drivers also free driver-private
+	data from port at this time.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	Many drivers use ata_port_stop() as this hook, which frees the
+	PRD table.
 	</para>
 	<para>
 	->host_stop() is called after all ->port_stop() calls
 have completed.  The hook must finalize hardware shutdown, release DMA
 and other resources, etc.
+	This hook may be specified as NULL, in which case it is not called.
 	</para>
 
 	</sect2>

Documentation/DocBook/scsidrivers.tmpl

@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
-<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
-<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
-	"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
-
-<book id="scsidrivers">
- <bookinfo>
-  <title>SCSI Subsystem Interfaces</title>
-  
-  <authorgroup>
-   <author>
-    <firstname>Douglas</firstname>
-    <surname>Gilbert</surname>
-    <affiliation>
-     <address>
-      <email>dgilbert@interlog.com</email>
-     </address>
-    </affiliation>
-   </author>
-  </authorgroup>
-  <pubdate>2003-08-11</pubdate>
-
-  <copyright>
-   <year>2002</year>
-   <year>2003</year>
-   <holder>Douglas Gilbert</holder>
-  </copyright>
-
-  <legalnotice>
-   <para>
-     This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
-     it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
-     License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
-     version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
-     version.
-   </para>
-      
-   <para>
-     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
-     useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
-     warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-     See the GNU General Public License for more details.
-   </para>
-      
-   <para>
-     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-     License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
-     Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
-     MA 02111-1307 USA
-   </para>
-      
-   <para>
-     For more details see the file COPYING in the source
-     distribution of Linux.
-   </para>
-  </legalnotice>
-
- </bookinfo>
-
-<toc></toc>
-
-  <chapter id="intro">
-      <title>Introduction</title>
-  <para>
-This document outlines the interface between the Linux scsi mid level
-and lower level drivers. Lower level drivers are variously called HBA
-(host bus adapter) drivers, host drivers (HD) or pseudo adapter drivers.
-The latter alludes to the fact that a lower level driver may be a
-bridge to another IO subsystem (and the "ide-scsi" driver is an example
-of this). There can be many lower level drivers active in a running
-system, but only one per hardware type. For example, the aic7xxx driver
-controls adaptec controllers based on the 7xxx chip series. Most lower
-level drivers can control one or more scsi hosts (a.k.a. scsi initiators).
-  </para>
-<para>
-This document can been found in an ASCII text file in the linux kernel 
-source: <filename>Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt</filename> .
-It currently hold a little more information than this document. The
-<filename>drivers/scsi/hosts.h</filename> and <filename>
-drivers/scsi/scsi.h</filename> headers contain descriptions of members
-of important structures for the scsi subsystem.
-</para>
-  </chapter>
-
-  <chapter id="driver-struct">
-      <title>Driver structure</title>
-  <para>
-Traditionally a lower level driver for the scsi subsystem has been
-at least two files in the drivers/scsi directory. For example, a
-driver called "xyz" has a header file "xyz.h" and a source file
-"xyz.c". [Actually there is no good reason why this couldn't all
-be in one file.] Some drivers that have been ported to several operating
-systems (e.g. aic7xxx which has separate  files for generic and
-OS-specific code) have more than two files. Such drivers tend to have
-their own directory under the drivers/scsi directory.
-  </para>
-  <para>
-scsi_module.c is normally included at the end of a lower
-level driver. For it to work a declaration like this is needed before
-it is included:
-<programlisting>
-    static Scsi_Host_Template driver_template = DRIVER_TEMPLATE;
-    /* DRIVER_TEMPLATE should contain pointers to supported interface
-       functions. Scsi_Host_Template is defined hosts.h */
-    #include "scsi_module.c"
-</programlisting>
-  </para>
-  <para>
-The scsi_module.c assumes the name "driver_template" is appropriately
-defined. It contains 2 functions:
-<orderedlist>
-<listitem><para>
-     init_this_scsi_driver() called during builtin and module driver
-     initialization: invokes mid level's scsi_register_host()
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-     exit_this_scsi_driver() called during closedown: invokes
-     mid level's scsi_unregister_host()
-</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-  </para>
-<para>
-When a new, lower level driver is being added to Linux, the following 
-files (all found in the drivers/scsi directory) will need some attention: 
-Makefile, Config.help and Config.in . It is probably best to look at what 
-an existing lower level driver does in this regard.
-</para>
-  </chapter>
-
-  <chapter id="intfunctions">
-     <title>Interface Functions</title>
-!EDocumentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt
-  </chapter>
-
-  <chapter id="locks">
-     <title>Locks</title>
-<para>
-Each Scsi_Host instance has a spin_lock called Scsi_Host::default_lock
-which is initialized in scsi_register() [found in hosts.c]. Within the
-same function the Scsi_Host::host_lock pointer is initialized to point
-at default_lock with the scsi_assign_lock() function. Thereafter
-lock and unlock operations performed by the mid level use the
-Scsi_Host::host_lock pointer.
-</para>
-<para>
-Lower level drivers can override the use of Scsi_Host::default_lock by
-using scsi_assign_lock(). The earliest opportunity to do this would
-be in the detect() function after it has invoked scsi_register(). It
-could be replaced by a coarser grain lock (e.g. per driver) or a
-lock of equal granularity (i.e. per host). Using finer grain locks
-(e.g. per scsi device) may be possible by juggling locks in
-queuecommand().
-</para>
-  </chapter>
-
-  <chapter id="changes">
-     <title>Changes since lk 2.4 series</title>
-<para>
-io_request_lock has been replaced by several finer grained locks. The lock
-relevant to lower level drivers is Scsi_Host::host_lock and there is one
-per scsi host.
-</para>
-<para>
-The older error handling mechanism has been removed. This means the
-lower level interface functions abort() and reset() have been removed.
-</para>
-<para>
-In the 2.4 series the scsi subsystem configuration descriptions were
-aggregated with the configuration descriptions from all other Linux
-subsystems in the Documentation/Configure.help file. In the 2.5 series,
-the scsi subsystem now has its own (much smaller) drivers/scsi/Config.help
-file.
-</para>
-  </chapter>
-
-  <chapter id="credits">
-     <title>Credits</title>
-<para>
-The following people have contributed to this document:
-<orderedlist>
-<listitem><para>
-Mike Anderson <email>andmike@us.ibm.com</email>
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-James Bottomley <email>James.Bottomley@steeleye.com</email>
-</para></listitem>
-<listitem><para>
-Patrick Mansfield <email>patmans@us.ibm.com</email>
-</para></listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-</para>
-  </chapter>
-
-</book>

Documentation/DocBook/stylesheet.xsl

@@ -2,4 +2,5 @@
 <stylesheet xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">
 <param name="chunk.quietly">1</param>
 <param name="funcsynopsis.style">ansi</param>
+<param name="funcsynopsis.tabular.threshold">80</param>
 </stylesheet>

Documentation/IPMI.txt

@@ -25,9 +25,10 @@ subject and I can't cover it all here!
 Configuration
 -------------
 
-The LinuxIPMI driver is modular, which means you have to pick several
+The Linux IPMI driver is modular, which means you have to pick several
 things to have it work right depending on your hardware.  Most of
-these are available in the 'Character Devices' menu.
+these are available in the 'Character Devices' menu then the IPMI
+menu.
 
 No matter what, you must pick 'IPMI top-level message handler' to use
 IPMI.  What you do beyond that depends on your needs and hardware.
@@ -35,33 +36,30 @@ IPMI.  What you do beyond that depends on your needs and hardware.
 The message handler does not provide any user-level interfaces.
 Kernel code (like the watchdog) can still use it.  If you need access
 from userland, you need to select 'Device interface for IPMI' if you
-want access through a device driver.  Another interface is also
-available, you may select 'IPMI sockets' in the 'Networking Support'
-main menu.  This provides a socket interface to IPMI.  You may select
-both of these at the same time, they will both work together.
+want access through a device driver.
 
-The driver interface depends on your hardware.  If you have a board
-with a standard interface (These will generally be either "KCS",
-"SMIC", or "BT", consult your hardware manual), choose the 'IPMI SI
-handler' option.  A driver also exists for direct I2C access to the
-IPMI management controller.  Some boards support this, but it is
-unknown if it will work on every board.  For this, choose 'IPMI SMBus
-handler', but be ready to try to do some figuring to see if it will
-work.
-
-There is also a KCS-only driver interface supplied, but it is
-depracated in favor of the SI interface.
+The driver interface depends on your hardware.  If your system
+properly provides the SMBIOS info for IPMI, the driver will detect it
+and just work.  If you have a board with a standard interface (These
+will generally be either "KCS", "SMIC", or "BT", consult your hardware
+manual), choose the 'IPMI SI handler' option.  A driver also exists
+for direct I2C access to the IPMI management controller.  Some boards
+support this, but it is unknown if it will work on every board.  For
+this, choose 'IPMI SMBus handler', but be ready to try to do some
+figuring to see if it will work on your system if the SMBIOS/APCI
+information is wrong or not present.  It is fairly safe to have both
+these enabled and let the drivers auto-detect what is present.
 
 You should generally enable ACPI on your system, as systems with IPMI
-should have ACPI tables describing them.
+can have ACPI tables describing them.
 
 If you have a standard interface and the board manufacturer has done
 their job correctly, the IPMI controller should be automatically
-detect (via ACPI or SMBIOS tables) and should just work.  Sadly, many
-boards do not have this information.  The driver attempts standard
-defaults, but they may not work.  If you fall into this situation, you
-need to read the section below named 'The SI Driver' on how to
-hand-configure your system.
+detected (via ACPI or SMBIOS tables) and should just work.  Sadly,
+many boards do not have this information.  The driver attempts
+standard defaults, but they may not work.  If you fall into this
+situation, you need to read the section below named 'The SI Driver' or
+"The SMBus Driver" on how to hand-configure your system.
 
 IPMI defines a standard watchdog timer.  You can enable this with the
 'IPMI Watchdog Timer' config option.  If you compile the driver into
@@ -73,6 +71,18 @@ closed (by default it is disabled on close).  Go into the 'Watchdog
 Cards' menu, enable 'Watchdog Timer Support', and enable the option
 'Disable watchdog shutdown on close'.
 
+IPMI systems can often be powered off using IPMI commands.  Select
+'IPMI Poweroff' to do this.  The driver will auto-detect if the system
+can be powered off by IPMI.  It is safe to enable this even if your
+system doesn't support this option.  This works on ATCA systems, the
+Radisys CPI1 card, and any IPMI system that supports standard chassis
+management commands.
+
+If you want the driver to put an event into the event log on a panic,
+enable the 'Generate a panic event to all BMCs on a panic' option.  If
+you want the whole panic string put into the event log using OEM
+events, enable the 'Generate OEM events containing the panic string'
+option.
 
 Basic Design
 ------------
@@ -80,7 +90,7 @@ Basic Design
 The Linux IPMI driver is designed to be very modular and flexible, you
 only need to take the pieces you need and you can use it in many
 different ways.  Because of that, it's broken into many chunks of
-code.  These chunks are:
+code.  These chunks (by module name) are:
 
 ipmi_msghandler - This is the central piece of software for the IPMI
 system.  It handles all messages, message timing, and responses.  The
@@ -93,18 +103,26 @@ ipmi_devintf - This provides a userland IOCTL interface for the IPMI
 driver, each open file for this device ties in to the message handler
 as an IPMI user.
 
-ipmi_si - A driver for various system interfaces.  This supports
-KCS, SMIC, and may support BT in the future.  Unless you have your own
-custom interface, you probably need to use this.
+ipmi_si - A driver for various system interfaces.  This supports KCS,
+SMIC, and BT interfaces.  Unless you have an SMBus interface or your
+own custom interface, you probably need to use this.
 
 ipmi_smb - A driver for accessing BMCs on the SMBus. It uses the
 I2C kernel driver's SMBus interfaces to send and receive IPMI messages
 over the SMBus.
 
-af_ipmi - A network socket interface to IPMI.  This doesn't take up
-a character device in your system.
+ipmi_watchdog - IPMI requires systems to have a very capable watchdog
+timer.  This driver implements the standard Linux watchdog timer
+interface on top of the IPMI message handler.
 
-Note that the KCS-only interface ahs been removed.
+ipmi_poweroff - Some systems support the ability to be turned off via
+IPMI commands.
+
+These are all individually selectable via configuration options.
+
+Note that the KCS-only interface has been removed.  The af_ipmi driver
+is no longer supported and has been removed because it was impossible
+to do 32 bit emulation on 64-bit kernels with it.
 
 Much documentation for the interface is in the include files.  The
 IPMI include files are:
@@ -424,7 +442,7 @@ at module load time (for a module) with:
   modprobe ipmi_smb.o
 	addr=<adapter1>,<i2caddr1>[,<adapter2>,<i2caddr2>[,...]]
 	dbg=<flags1>,<flags2>...
-	[defaultprobe=0] [dbg_probe=1]
+	[defaultprobe=1] [dbg_probe=1]
 
 The addresses are specified in pairs, the first is the adapter ID and the
 second is the I2C address on that adapter.
@@ -532,3 +550,67 @@ Once you open the watchdog timer, you must write a 'V' character to the
 device to close it, or the timer will not stop.  This is a new semantic
 for the driver, but makes it consistent with the rest of the watchdog
 drivers in Linux.
+
+
+Panic Timeouts
+--------------
+
+The OpenIPMI driver supports the ability to put semi-custom and custom
+events in the system event log if a panic occurs.  if you enable the
+'Generate a panic event to all BMCs on a panic' option, you will get
+one event on a panic in a standard IPMI event format.  If you enable
+the 'Generate OEM events containing the panic string' option, you will
+also get a bunch of OEM events holding the panic string.
+
+
+The field settings of the events are:
+* Generator ID: 0x21 (kernel)
+* EvM Rev: 0x03 (this event is formatting in IPMI 1.0 format)
+* Sensor Type: 0x20 (OS critical stop sensor)
+* Sensor #: The first byte of the panic string (0 if no panic string)
+* Event Dir | Event Type: 0x6f (Assertion, sensor-specific event info)
+* Event Data 1: 0xa1 (Runtime stop in OEM bytes 2 and 3)
+* Event data 2: second byte of panic string
+* Event data 3: third byte of panic string
+See the IPMI spec for the details of the event layout.  This event is
+always sent to the local management controller.  It will handle routing
+the message to the right place
+
+Other OEM events have the following format:
+Record ID (bytes 0-1): Set by the SEL.
+Record type (byte 2): 0xf0 (OEM non-timestamped)
+byte 3: The slave address of the card saving the panic
+byte 4: A sequence number (starting at zero)
+The rest of the bytes (11 bytes) are the panic string.  If the panic string
+is longer than 11 bytes, multiple messages will be sent with increasing
+sequence numbers.
+
+Because you cannot send OEM events using the standard interface, this
+function will attempt to find an SEL and add the events there.  It
+will first query the capabilities of the local management controller.
+If it has an SEL, then they will be stored in the SEL of the local
+management controller.  If not, and the local management controller is
+an event generator, the event receiver from the local management
+controller will be queried and the events sent to the SEL on that
+device.  Otherwise, the events go nowhere since there is nowhere to
+send them.
+
+
+Poweroff
+--------
+
+If the poweroff capability is selected, the IPMI driver will install
+a shutdown function into the standard poweroff function pointer.  This
+is in the ipmi_poweroff module.  When the system requests a powerdown,
+it will send the proper IPMI commands to do this.  This is supported on
+several platforms.
+
+There is a module parameter named "poweroff_control" that may either be zero
+(do a power down) or 2 (do a power cycle, power the system off, then power
+it on in a few seconds).  Setting ipmi_poweroff.poweroff_control=x will do
+the same thing on the kernel command line.  The parameter is also available
+via the proc filesystem in /proc/ipmi/poweroff_control.  Note that if the
+system does not support power cycling, it will always to the power off.
+
+Note that if you have ACPI enabled, the system will prefer using ACPI to
+power off.

Documentation/SubmittingDrivers

@@ -13,13 +13,14 @@ Allocating Device Numbers
 -------------------------
 
 Major and minor numbers for block and character devices are allocated
-by the Linux assigned name and number authority (currently better
-known as H Peter Anvin). The site is http://www.lanana.org/. This
+by the Linux assigned name and number authority (currently this is
+Torben Mathiasen). The site is http://www.lanana.org/. This
 also deals with allocating numbers for devices that are not going to
 be submitted to the mainstream kernel.
+See Documentation/devices.txt for more information on this.
 
-If you don't use assigned numbers then when you device is submitted it will
-get given an assigned number even if that is different from values you may
+If you don't use assigned numbers then when your device is submitted it will
+be given an assigned number even if that is different from values you may
 have shipped to customers before.
 
 Who To Submit Drivers To
@@ -32,7 +33,8 @@ Linux 2.2:
 	If the code area has a general maintainer then please submit it to
 	the maintainer listed in MAINTAINERS in the kernel file. If the
 	maintainer does not respond or you cannot find the appropriate
-	maintainer then please contact Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk>
+	maintainer then please contact the 2.2 kernel maintainer:
+	Marc-Christian Petersen <m.c.p@wolk-project.de>.
 
 Linux 2.4:
 	The same rules apply as 2.2. The final contact point for Linux 2.4
@@ -48,7 +50,7 @@ What Criteria Determine Acceptance
 
 Licensing:	The code must be released to us under the
 		GNU General Public License. We don't insist on any kind
-		of exclusively GPL licensing, and if you wish the driver
+		of exclusive GPL licensing, and if you wish the driver
 		to be useful to other communities such as BSD you may well
 		wish to release under multiple licenses.
 

Documentation/SubmittingPatches

@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ not in any lower subdirectory.
 
 To create a patch for a single file, it is often sufficient to do:
 
-	SRCTREE= linux-2.4
+	SRCTREE= linux-2.6
 	MYFILE=  drivers/net/mydriver.c
 
 	cd $SRCTREE
@@ -48,17 +48,18 @@ To create a patch for multiple files, you should unpack a "vanilla",
 or unmodified kernel source tree, and generate a diff against your
 own source tree.  For example:
 
-	MYSRC= /devel/linux-2.4
+	MYSRC= /devel/linux-2.6
 
-	tar xvfz linux-2.4.0-test11.tar.gz
-	mv linux linux-vanilla
-	wget http://www.moses.uklinux.net/patches/dontdiff
-	diff -uprN -X dontdiff linux-vanilla $MYSRC > /tmp/patch
-	rm -f dontdiff
+	tar xvfz linux-2.6.12.tar.gz
+	mv linux-2.6.12 linux-2.6.12-vanilla
+	diff -uprN -X linux-2.6.12-vanilla/Documentation/dontdiff \
+		linux-2.6.12-vanilla $MYSRC > /tmp/patch
 
 "dontdiff" is a list of files which are generated by the kernel during
 the build process, and should be ignored in any diff(1)-generated
-patch.  dontdiff is maintained by Tigran Aivazian <tigran@veritas.com>
+patch.  The "dontdiff" file is included in the kernel tree in
+2.6.12 and later.  For earlier kernel versions, you can get it
+from <http://www.xenotime.net/linux/doc/dontdiff>.
 
 Make sure your patch does not include any extra files which do not
 belong in a patch submission.  Make sure to review your patch -after-
@@ -66,18 +67,20 @@ generated it with diff(1), to ensure accuracy.
 
 If your changes produce a lot of deltas, you may want to look into
 splitting them into individual patches which modify things in
-logical stages, this will facilitate easier reviewing by other
+logical stages.  This will facilitate easier reviewing by other
 kernel developers, very important if you want your patch accepted.
-There are a number of scripts which can aid in this;
+There are a number of scripts which can aid in this:
 
 Quilt:
 http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt
 
 Randy Dunlap's patch scripts:
-http://developer.osdl.org/rddunlap/scripts/patching-scripts.tgz
+http://www.xenotime.net/linux/scripts/patching-scripts-002.tar.gz
 
 Andrew Morton's patch scripts:
-http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/patch-scripts-0.16
+http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/patch-scripts-0.20
+
+
 
 2) Describe your changes.
 
@@ -132,21 +135,6 @@ which require discussion or do not have a clear advantage should
 usually be sent first to linux-kernel.  Only after the patch is
 discussed should the patch then be submitted to Linus.
 
-For small patches you may want to CC the Trivial Patch Monkey
-trivial@rustcorp.com.au set up by Rusty Russell; which collects "trivial"
-patches. Trivial patches must qualify for one of the following rules:
- Spelling fixes in documentation
- Spelling fixes which could break grep(1).
- Warning fixes (cluttering with useless warnings is bad)
- Compilation fixes (only if they are actually correct)
- Runtime fixes (only if they actually fix things)
- Removing use of deprecated functions/macros (eg. check_region).
- Contact detail and documentation fixes
- Non-portable code replaced by portable code (even in arch-specific,
- since people copy, as long as it's trivial)
- Any fix by the author/maintainer of the file. (ie. patch monkey
- in re-transmission mode)
-
 
 
 5) Select your CC (e-mail carbon copy) list.
@@ -161,6 +149,11 @@ USB, framebuffer devices, the VFS, the SCSI subsystem, etc.  See the
 MAINTAINERS file for a mailing list that relates specifically to
 your change.
 
+If changes affect userland-kernel interfaces, please send
+the MAN-PAGES maintainer (as listed in the MAINTAINERS file)
+a man-pages patch, or at least a notification of the change,
+so that some information makes its way into the manual pages.
+
 Even if the maintainer did not respond in step #4, make sure to ALWAYS
 copy the maintainer when you change their code.
 
@@ -178,6 +171,8 @@ patches. Trivial patches must qualify for one of the following rules:
  since people copy, as long as it's trivial)
  Any fix by the author/maintainer of the file. (ie. patch monkey
  in re-transmission mode)
+URL: <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/rusty/trivial/>
+
 
 
 
@@ -299,13 +294,24 @@ can certify the below:
 
 then you just add a line saying
 
-	Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.org>
+	Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org>
 
 Some people also put extra tags at the end.  They'll just be ignored for
 now, but you can do this to mark internal company procedures or just
 point out some special detail about the sign-off. 
 
 
+
+12) More references for submitting patches
+
+Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp).
+  <http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/patches/stuff/tpp.txt>
+
+Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format."
+  <http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html>
+
+
+
 -----------------------------------
 SECTION 2 - HINTS, TIPS, AND TRICKS
 -----------------------------------
@@ -374,7 +380,5 @@ and 'extern __inline__'.
 4) Don't over-design.
 
 Don't try to anticipate nebulous future cases which may or may not
-be useful:  "Make it as simple as you can, and no simpler"
-
-
+be useful:  "Make it as simple as you can, and no simpler."
 

Documentation/acpi-hotkey.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+driver/acpi/hotkey.c implement:
+1. /proc/acpi/hotkey/event_config 
+(event based hotkey or event config interface):
+a. add a  event based hotkey(event) : 
+echo "0:bus::action:method:num:num" > event_config
+
+b. delete a event based hotkey(event): 
+echo "1:::::num:num" > event_config
+
+c.  modify a event based hotkey(event):    
+echo "2:bus::action:method:num:num" > event_config
+
+2. /proc/acpi/hotkey/poll_config 
+(polling based hotkey or event config interface):
+a.add a polling based hotkey(event) : 	
+echo "0:bus:method:action:method:num" > poll_config
+this adding command will create a proc file 
+/proc/acpi/hotkey/method, which is used to get 
+result of polling.
+
+b.delete a polling based hotkey(event): 	
+echo "1:::::num" > event_config
+
+c.modify a polling based hotkey(event):    
+echo "2:bus:method:action:method:num" > poll_config
+
+3./proc/acpi/hotkey/action 
+(interface to call aml method associated with a 
+specific hotkey(event))
+echo "event_num:event_type:event_argument" > 
+	/proc/acpi/hotkey/action.
+The result of the execution of this aml method is 
+attached to /proc/acpi/hotkey/poll_method, which is dnyamically
+created.  Please use command "cat /proc/acpi/hotkey/polling_method" 
+to retrieve it.
+
+Note: Use cmdline "acpi_generic_hotkey" to over-ride
+loading any platform specific drivers.

Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+			S3C24XX USB Host support
+			========================
+
+
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+  This document details the S3C2410/S3C2440 in-built OHCI USB host support.
+
+Configuration
+-------------
+
+  Enable at least the following kernel options:
+
+  menuconfig:
+
+   Device Drivers  --->
+     USB support  --->
+       <*> Support for Host-side USB
+       <*>   OHCI HCD support
+
+
+  .config:
+    CONFIG_USB
+    CONFIG_USB_OHCI_HCD
+
+
+  Once these options are configured, the standard set of USB device
+  drivers can be configured and used.
+
+
+Board Support
+-------------
+
+  The driver attaches to a platform device, which will need to be
+  added by the board specific support file in linux/arch/arm/mach-s3c2410,
+  such as mach-bast.c or mach-smdk2410.c
+
+  The platform device's platform_data field is only needed if the
+  board implements extra power control or over-current monitoring.
+
+  The OHCI driver does not ensure the state of the S3C2410's MISCCTRL
+  register, so if both ports are to be used for the host, then it is
+  the board support file's responsibility to ensure that the second
+  port is configured to be connected to the OHCI core.
+
+
+Platform Data
+-------------
+
+  See linux/include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/usb-control.h for the
+  descriptions of the platform device data. An implementation
+  can be found in linux/arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/usb-simtec.c .
+
+  The `struct s3c2410_hcd_info` contains a pair of functions
+  that get called to enable over-current detection, and to
+  control the port power status.
+
+  The ports are numbered 0 and 1.
+
+  power_control:
+
+    Called to enable or disable the power on the port.
+
+  enable_oc:
+
+    Called to enable or disable the over-current monitoring.
+    This should claim or release the resources being used to
+    check the power condition on the port, such as an IRQ.
+
+  report_oc:
+
+    The OHCI driver fills this field in for the over-current code
+    to call when there is a change to the over-current state on
+    an port. The ports argument is a bitmask of 1 bit per port,
+    with bit X being 1 for an over-current on port X.
+
+    The function s3c2410_usb_report_oc() has been provided to
+    ensure this is called correctly.
+
+  port[x]:
+
+    This is struct describes each port, 0 or 1. The platform driver
+    should set the flags field of each port to S3C_HCDFLG_USED if
+    the port is enabled.
+
+
+
+Document Author
+---------------
+
+Ben Dooks, (c) 2005 Simtec Electronics

Documentation/basic_profiling.txt

@@ -27,9 +27,13 @@ dump output	readprofile -m /boot/System.map > captured_profile
 
 Oprofile
 --------
-Get the source (I use 0.8) from http://oprofile.sourceforge.net/
-and add "idle=poll" to the kernel command line
+
+Get the source (see Changes for required version) from
+http://oprofile.sourceforge.net/ and add "idle=poll" to the kernel command
+line.
+
 Configure with CONFIG_PROFILING=y and CONFIG_OPROFILE=y & reboot on new kernel
+
 ./configure --with-kernel-support
 make install
 
@@ -46,7 +50,7 @@ start		opcontrol --start
 stop		opcontrol --stop
 dump output	opreport >  output_file
 
-To only report on the kernel, run opreport /boot/vmlinux > output_file
+To only report on the kernel, run opreport -l /boot/vmlinux > output_file
 
 A reset is needed to clear old statistics, which survive a reboot.
 

Documentation/block/ioprio.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+Block io priorities
+===================
+
+
+Intro
+-----
+
+With the introduction of cfq v3 (aka cfq-ts or time sliced cfq), basic io
+priorities is supported for reads on files. This enables users to io nice
+processes or process groups, similar to what has been possible to cpu
+scheduling for ages. This document mainly details the current possibilites
+with cfq, other io schedulers do not support io priorities so far.
+
+Scheduling classes
+------------------
+
+CFQ implements three generic scheduling classes that determine how io is
+served for a process.
+
+IOPRIO_CLASS_RT: This is the realtime io class. This scheduling class is given
+higher priority than any other in the system, processes from this class are
+given first access to the disk every time. Thus it needs to be used with some
+care, one io RT process can starve the entire system. Within the RT class,
+there are 8 levels of class data that determine exactly how much time this
+process needs the disk for on each service. In the future this might change
+to be more directly mappable to performance, by passing in a wanted data
+rate instead.
+
+IOPRIO_CLASS_BE: This is the best-effort scheduling class, which is the default
+for any process that hasn't set a specific io priority. The class data
+determines how much io bandwidth the process will get, it's directly mappable
+to the cpu nice levels just more coarsely implemented. 0 is the highest
+BE prio level, 7 is the lowest. The mapping between cpu nice level and io
+nice level is determined as: io_nice = (cpu_nice + 20) / 5.
+
+IOPRIO_CLASS_IDLE: This is the idle scheduling class, processes running at this
+level only get io time when no one else needs the disk. The idle class has no
+class data, since it doesn't really apply here.
+
+Tools
+-----
+
+See below for a sample ionice tool. Usage:
+
+# ionice -c<class> -n<level> -p<pid>
+
+If pid isn't given, the current process is assumed. IO priority settings
+are inherited on fork, so you can use ionice to start the process at a given
+level:
+
+# ionice -c2 -n0 /bin/ls
+
+will run ls at the best-effort scheduling class at the highest priority.
+For a running process, you can give the pid instead:
+
+# ionice -c1 -n2 -p100
+
+will change pid 100 to run at the realtime scheduling class, at priority 2.
+
+---> snip ionice.c tool <---
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <getopt.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/ptrace.h>
+#include <asm/unistd.h>
+
+extern int sys_ioprio_set(int, int, int);
+extern int sys_ioprio_get(int, int);
+
+#if defined(__i386__)
+#define __NR_ioprio_set		289
+#define __NR_ioprio_get		290
+#elif defined(__ppc__)
+#define __NR_ioprio_set		273
+#define __NR_ioprio_get		274
+#elif defined(__x86_64__)
+#define __NR_ioprio_set		251
+#define __NR_ioprio_get		252
+#elif defined(__ia64__)
+#define __NR_ioprio_set		1274
+#define __NR_ioprio_get		1275
+#else
+#error "Unsupported arch"
+#endif
+
+_syscall3(int, ioprio_set, int, which, int, who, int, ioprio);
+_syscall2(int, ioprio_get, int, which, int, who);
+
+enum {
+	IOPRIO_CLASS_NONE,
+	IOPRIO_CLASS_RT,
+	IOPRIO_CLASS_BE,
+	IOPRIO_CLASS_IDLE,
+};
+
+enum {
+	IOPRIO_WHO_PROCESS = 1,
+	IOPRIO_WHO_PGRP,
+	IOPRIO_WHO_USER,
+};
+
+#define IOPRIO_CLASS_SHIFT	13
+
+const char *to_prio[] = { "none", "realtime", "best-effort", "idle", };
+
+int main(int argc, char *argv[])
+{
+	int ioprio = 4, set = 0, ioprio_class = IOPRIO_CLASS_BE;
+	int c, pid = 0;
+
+	while ((c = getopt(argc, argv, "+n:c:p:")) != EOF) {
+		switch (c) {
+		case 'n':
+			ioprio = strtol(optarg, NULL, 10);
+			set = 1;
+			break;
+		case 'c':
+			ioprio_class = strtol(optarg, NULL, 10);
+			set = 1;
+			break;
+		case 'p':
+			pid = strtol(optarg, NULL, 10);
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	switch (ioprio_class) {
+		case IOPRIO_CLASS_NONE:
+			ioprio_class = IOPRIO_CLASS_BE;
+			break;
+		case IOPRIO_CLASS_RT:
+		case IOPRIO_CLASS_BE:
+			break;
+		case IOPRIO_CLASS_IDLE:
+			ioprio = 7;
+			break;
+		default:
+			printf("bad prio class %d\n", ioprio_class);
+			return 1;
+	}
+
+	if (!set) {
+		if (!pid && argv[optind])
+			pid = strtol(argv[optind], NULL, 10);
+
+		ioprio = ioprio_get(IOPRIO_WHO_PROCESS, pid);
+
+		printf("pid=%d, %d\n", pid, ioprio);
+
+		if (ioprio == -1)
+			perror("ioprio_get");
+		else {
+			ioprio_class = ioprio >> IOPRIO_CLASS_SHIFT;
+			ioprio = ioprio & 0xff;
+			printf("%s: prio %d\n", to_prio[ioprio_class], ioprio);
+		}
+	} else {
+		if (ioprio_set(IOPRIO_WHO_PROCESS, pid, ioprio | ioprio_class << IOPRIO_CLASS_SHIFT) == -1) {
+			perror("ioprio_set");
+			return 1;
+		}
+
+		if (argv[optind])
+			execvp(argv[optind], &argv[optind]);
+	}
+
+	return 0;
+}
+
+---> snip ionice.c tool <---
+
+
+March 11 2005, Jens Axboe <axboe@suse.de>

Documentation/cciss.txt

@@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ This driver is known to work with the following cards:
 	* SA P600
 	* SA P800
 	* SA E400
+	* SA E300
 
 If nodes are not already created in the /dev/cciss directory, run as root:
 

Documentation/cdrom/sbpcd

@@ -419,6 +419,7 @@ into the file "track01":
  */
 #include <stdio.h>
 #include <sys/ioctl.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
 #include <linux/cdrom.h>
 
 static struct cdrom_tochdr hdr;
@@ -429,7 +430,7 @@ static int datafile, drive;
 static int i, j, limit, track, err;
 static char filename[32];
 
-main(int argc, char *argv[])
+int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 {
 /*
  * open /dev/cdrom
@@ -516,6 +517,7 @@ entry[track+1].cdte_addr.lba=entry[track].cdte_addr.lba+300;
 	}
       arg.addr.lba++;
     }
+    return 0;
 }
 /*===================== end program ========================================*/
 
@@ -564,15 +566,16 @@ Appendix -- the "cdtester" utility:
 #include <stdio.h>
 #include <malloc.h>
 #include <sys/ioctl.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
 #include <linux/cdrom.h>
 
 #ifdef AZT_PRIVATE_IOCTLS
 #include <linux/../../drivers/cdrom/aztcd.h>
-#endif AZT_PRIVATE_IOCTLS
+#endif /* AZT_PRIVATE_IOCTLS */
 #ifdef SBP_PRIVATE_IOCTLS
 #include <linux/../../drivers/cdrom/sbpcd.h>
 #include <linux/fs.h>
-#endif SBP_PRIVATE_IOCTLS
+#endif /* SBP_PRIVATE_IOCTLS */
 
 struct cdrom_tochdr hdr;
 struct cdrom_tochdr tocHdr;
@@ -590,7 +593,7 @@ union
 	struct cdrom_msf msf;
 	unsigned char buf[CD_FRAMESIZE_RAW];
 } azt;
-#endif AZT_PRIVATE_IOCTLS
+#endif /* AZT_PRIVATE_IOCTLS */
 int i, i1, i2, i3, j, k;
 unsigned char sequence=0;
 unsigned char command[80];
@@ -738,7 +741,7 @@ void display(int size,unsigned char *buffer)
 	} 
 } 
 
-main(int argc, char *argv[])
+int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 {
 	printf("\nTesting tool for a CDROM driver's audio functions V0.1\n");
 	printf("(C) 1995 Eberhard Moenkeberg <emoenke@gwdg.de>\n");
@@ -1046,12 +1049,13 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[])
 			rc=ioctl(drive,CDROMAUDIOBUFSIZ,j);
 			printf("%d frames granted.\n",rc);
 			break;
-#endif SBP_PRIVATE_IOCTLS
+#endif /* SBP_PRIVATE_IOCTLS */
 		default:
 			printf("unknown command: \"%s\".\n",command);
 			break;
 		}
 	}
+	return 0;
 }
 /*==========================================================================*/
 

Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt

@@ -9,6 +9,7 @@
 
 
 		    Dominik Brodowski  <linux@brodo.de>
+            some additions and corrections by Nico Golde <nico@ngolde.de>
 
 
 
@@ -25,6 +26,7 @@ Contents:
 2.1  Performance
 2.2  Powersave
 2.3  Userspace
+2.4  Ondemand
 
 3.   The Governor Interface in the CPUfreq Core
 
@@ -86,7 +88,7 @@ highest frequency within the borders of scaling_min_freq and
 scaling_max_freq.
 
 
-2.1 Powersave
+2.2 Powersave
 -------------
 
 The CPUfreq governor "powersave" sets the CPU statically to the
@@ -94,7 +96,7 @@ lowest frequency within the borders of scaling_min_freq and
 scaling_max_freq.
 
 
-2.2 Userspace
+2.3 Userspace
 -------------
 
 The CPUfreq governor "userspace" allows the user, or any userspace
@@ -103,6 +105,14 @@ by making a sysfs file "scaling_setspeed" available in the CPU-device
 directory.
 
 
+2.4 Ondemand
+------------
+
+The CPUfreq govenor "ondemand" sets the CPU depending on the
+current usage. To do this the CPU must have the capability to
+switch the frequency very fast.
+
+
 
 3. The Governor Interface in the CPUfreq Core
 =============================================

Documentation/cpusets.txt

@@ -51,6 +51,14 @@ mems_allowed vector.
 
 If a cpuset is cpu or mem exclusive, no other cpuset, other than a direct
 ancestor or descendent, may share any of the same CPUs or Memory Nodes.
+A cpuset that is cpu exclusive has a sched domain associated with it.
+The sched domain consists of all cpus in the current cpuset that are not
+part of any exclusive child cpusets.
+This ensures that the scheduler load balacing code only balances
+against the cpus that are in the sched domain as defined above and not
+all of the cpus in the system. This removes any overhead due to
+load balancing code trying to pull tasks outside of the cpu exclusive
+cpuset only to be prevented by the tasks' cpus_allowed mask.
 
 User level code may create and destroy cpusets by name in the cpuset
 virtual file system, manage the attributes and permissions of these
@@ -84,6 +92,9 @@ This can be especially valuable on:
       and a database), or
     * NUMA systems running large HPC applications with demanding
       performance characteristics.
+    * Also cpu_exclusive cpusets are useful for servers running orthogonal
+      workloads such as RT applications requiring low latency and HPC
+      applications that are throughput sensitive
 
 These subsets, or "soft partitions" must be able to be dynamically
 adjusted, as the job mix changes, without impacting other concurrently
@@ -125,6 +136,8 @@ Cpusets extends these two mechanisms as follows:
  - A cpuset may be marked exclusive, which ensures that no other
    cpuset (except direct ancestors and descendents) may contain
    any overlapping CPUs or Memory Nodes.
+   Also a cpu_exclusive cpuset would be associated with a sched
+   domain.
  - You can list all the tasks (by pid) attached to any cpuset.
 
 The implementation of cpusets requires a few, simple hooks
@@ -136,6 +149,9 @@ into the rest of the kernel, none in performance critical paths:
    allowed in that tasks cpuset.
  - in sched.c migrate_all_tasks(), to keep migrating tasks within
    the CPUs allowed by their cpuset, if possible.
+ - in sched.c, a new API partition_sched_domains for handling
+   sched domain changes associated with cpu_exclusive cpusets
+   and related changes in both sched.c and arch/ia64/kernel/domain.c
  - in the mbind and set_mempolicy system calls, to mask the requested
    Memory Nodes by what's allowed in that tasks cpuset.
  - in page_alloc, to restrict memory to allowed nodes.

Documentation/devices.txt

@@ -94,6 +94,7 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
 		  9 = /dev/urandom	Faster, less secure random number gen.
 		 10 = /dev/aio		Asyncronous I/O notification interface
 		 11 = /dev/kmsg		Writes to this come out as printk's
+		 12 = /dev/oldmem	Access to crash dump from kexec kernel
   1 block	RAM disk
 		  0 = /dev/ram0		First RAM disk
 		  1 = /dev/ram1		Second RAM disk

Documentation/dontdiff

@@ -41,6 +41,7 @@ COPYING
 CREDITS
 CVS
 ChangeSet
+Image
 Kerntypes
 MODS.txt
 Module.symvers
@@ -103,6 +104,8 @@ logo_*.c
 logo_*_clut224.c
 logo_*_mono.c
 lxdialog
+mach-types
+mach-types.h
 make_times_h
 map
 maui_boot.h
@@ -111,6 +114,7 @@ mkdep
 mktables
 modpost
 modversions.h*
+offset.h
 offsets.h
 oui.c*
 parse.c*

Documentation/driver-model/device.txt

@@ -76,6 +76,14 @@ driver_data:   Driver-specific data.
 
 platform_data: Platform data specific to the device.
 
+	       Example:  for devices on custom boards, as typical of embedded
+	       and SOC based hardware, Linux often uses platform_data to point
+	       to board-specific structures describing devices and how they
+	       are wired.  That can include what ports are available, chip
+	       variants, which GPIO pins act in what additional roles, and so
+	       on.  This shrinks the "Board Support Packages" (BSPs) and
+	       minimizes board-specific #ifdefs in drivers.
+
 current_state: Current power state of the device.
 
 saved_state:   Pointer to saved state of the device. This is usable by

Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt

@@ -5,21 +5,17 @@ struct device_driver {
         char                    * name;
         struct bus_type         * bus;
 
-        rwlock_t                lock;
-        atomic_t                refcount;
-
-        list_t                  bus_list;
+        struct completion	unloaded;
+        struct kobject		kobj;
         list_t                  devices;
 
-        struct driver_dir_entry dir;
+        struct module		*owner;
 
         int     (*probe)        (struct device * dev);
         int     (*remove)       (struct device * dev);
 
         int     (*suspend)      (struct device * dev, pm_message_t state, u32 level);
         int     (*resume)       (struct device * dev, u32 level);
-
-        void    (*release)      (struct device_driver * drv);
 };
 
 
@@ -51,7 +47,6 @@ being converted completely to the new model.
 static struct device_driver eepro100_driver = {
        .name		= "eepro100",
        .bus		= &pci_bus_type,
-       .devclass	= &ethernet_devclass,	/* when it's implemented */
        
        .probe		= eepro100_probe,
        .remove		= eepro100_remove,
@@ -85,7 +80,6 @@ static struct pci_driver eepro100_driver = {
        .driver	       = {
 		.name		= "eepro100",
 		.bus		= &pci_bus_type,
-		.devclass	= &ethernet_devclass,	/* when it's implemented */
 		.probe		= eepro100_probe,
 		.remove		= eepro100_remove,
 		.suspend	= eepro100_suspend,
@@ -166,27 +160,32 @@ Callbacks
 
 	int	(*probe)	(struct device * dev);
 
-probe is called to verify the existence of a certain type of
-hardware. This is called during the driver binding process, after the
-bus has verified that the device ID of a device matches one of the
-device IDs supported by the driver. 
+The probe() entry is called in task context, with the bus's rwsem locked
+and the driver partially bound to the device.  Drivers commonly use
+container_of() to convert "dev" to a bus-specific type, both in probe()
+and other routines.  That type often provides device resource data, such
+as pci_dev.resource[] or platform_device.resources, which is used in
+addition to dev->platform_data to initialize the driver.
 
-This callback only verifies that there actually is supported hardware
-present. It may allocate a driver-specific structure, but it should
-not do any initialization of the hardware itself. The device-specific
-structure may be stored in the device's driver_data field. 
+This callback holds the driver-specific logic to bind the driver to a
+given device.  That includes verifying that the device is present, that
+it's a version the driver can handle, that driver data structures can
+be allocated and initialized, and that any hardware can be initialized.
+Drivers often store a pointer to their state with dev_set_drvdata().
+When the driver has successfully bound itself to that device, then probe()
+returns zero and the driver model code will finish its part of binding
+the driver to that device.
 
-	int	(*init)		(struct device * dev);
-
-init is called during the binding stage. It is called after probe has
-successfully returned and the device has been registered with its
-class. It is responsible for initializing the hardware.
+A driver's probe() may return a negative errno value to indicate that
+the driver did not bind to this device, in which case it should have
+released all reasources it allocated.
 
 	int 	(*remove)	(struct device * dev);
 
-remove is called to dissociate a driver with a device. This may be
+remove is called to unbind a driver from a device. This may be
 called if a device is physically removed from the system, if the
-driver module is being unloaded, or during a reboot sequence. 
+driver module is being unloaded, during a reboot sequence, or
+in other cases.
 
 It is up to the driver to determine if the device is present or
 not. It should free any resources allocated specifically for the

Documentation/dvb/README.dibusb

@@ -1,285 +0,0 @@
-Documentation for dib3000* frontend drivers and dibusb device driver
-====================================================================
-
-Copyright (C) 2004-5 Patrick Boettcher (patrick.boettcher@desy.de),
-
-dibusb and dib3000mb/mc drivers based on GPL code, which has
-
-Copyright (C) 2004 Amaury Demol for DiBcom (ademol@dibcom.fr)
-
-This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
-modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-published by the Free Software Foundation, version 2.
-
-
-Supported devices USB1.1
-========================
-
-Produced and reselled by Twinhan:
----------------------------------
-- TwinhanDTV USB-Ter DVB-T Device (VP7041)
-	http://www.twinhan.com/product_terrestrial_3.asp
-
-- TwinhanDTV Magic Box (VP7041e)
-	http://www.twinhan.com/product_terrestrial_4.asp
-
-- HAMA DVB-T USB device
-	http://www.hama.de/portal/articleId*110620/action*2598
-
-- CTS Portable (Chinese Television System) (2)
-	http://www.2cts.tv/ctsportable/
-
-- Unknown USB DVB-T device with vendor ID Hyper-Paltek
-
-
-Produced and reselled by KWorld:
---------------------------------
-- KWorld V-Stream XPERT DTV DVB-T USB
-	http://www.kworld.com.tw/en/product/DVBT-USB/DVBT-USB.html
-
-- JetWay DTV DVB-T USB
-	http://www.jetway.com.tw/evisn/product/lcd-tv/DVT-USB/dtv-usb.htm
-
-- ADSTech Instant TV DVB-T USB
-	http://www.adstech.com/products/PTV-333/intro/PTV-333_intro.asp?pid=PTV-333
-
-
-Others:
--------
-- Ultima Electronic/Artec T1 USB TVBOX (AN2135, AN2235, AN2235 with Panasonic Tuner)
-	http://82.161.246.249/products-tvbox.html
-
-- Compro Videomate DVB-U2000 - DVB-T USB (2)
-	http://www.comprousa.com/products/vmu2000.htm
-
-- Grandtec USB DVB-T
-	http://www.grand.com.tw/
-
-- Avermedia AverTV DVBT USB (2)
-	http://www.avermedia.com/
-
-- DiBcom USB DVB-T reference device (non-public)
-
-
-Supported devices USB2.0
-========================
-- Twinhan MagicBox II (2)
-	http://www.twinhan.com/product_terrestrial_7.asp
-
-- Hanftek UMT-010 (1)
-	http://www.globalsources.com/si/6008819757082/ProductDetail/Digital-TV/product_id-100046529
-
-- Typhoon/Yakumo/HAMA DVB-T mobile USB2.0 (1)
-	http://www.yakumo.de/produkte/index.php?pid=1&ag=DVB-T
-
-- Artec T1 USB TVBOX (FX2) (2)
-
-- Hauppauge WinTV NOVA-T USB2
-	http://www.hauppauge.com/
-
-- KWorld/ADSTech Instant DVB-T USB2.0 (DiB3000M-B)
-
-- DiBcom USB2.0 DVB-T reference device (non-public)
-
-1) It is working almost.
-2) No test reports received yet.
-
-
-0. NEWS:
-  2005-02-11 - added support for the KWorld/ADSTech Instant DVB-T USB2.0. Thanks a lot to Joachim von Caron
-  2005-02-02 - added support for the Hauppauge Win-TV Nova-T USB2
-  2005-01-31 - distorted streaming is finally gone for USB1.1 devices
-  2005-01-13 - moved the mirrored pid_filter_table back to dvb-dibusb
-             - first almost working version for HanfTek UMT-010
-             - found out, that Yakumo/HAMA/Typhoon are predessors of the HanfTek UMT-010
-  2005-01-10 - refactoring completed, now everything is very delightful
-             - tuner quirks for some weird devices (Artec T1 AN2235 device has sometimes a
-               Panasonic Tuner assembled). Tunerprobing implemented. Thanks a lot to Gunnar Wittich.
-  2004-12-29 - after several days of struggling around bug of no returning URBs fixed.
-  2004-12-26 - refactored the dibusb-driver, splitted into separate files
-             - i2c-probing enabled
-  2004-12-06 - possibility for demod i2c-address probing
-             - new usb IDs (Compro,Artec)
-  2004-11-23 - merged changes from DiB3000MC_ver2.1
-             - revised the debugging
-             - possibility to deliver the complete TS for USB2.0
-  2004-11-21 - first working version of the dib3000mc/p frontend driver.
-  2004-11-12 - added additional remote control keys. Thanks to Uwe Hanke.
-  2004-11-07 - added remote control support. Thanks to David Matthews.
-  2004-11-05 - added support for a new devices (Grandtec/Avermedia/Artec)
-             - merged my changes (for dib3000mb/dibusb) to the FE_REFACTORING, because it became HEAD
-             - moved transfer control (pid filter, fifo control) from usb driver to frontend, it seems
-               better settled there (added xfer_ops-struct)
-             - created a common files for frontends (mc/p/mb)
-  2004-09-28 - added support for a new device (Unkown, vendor ID is Hyper-Paltek)
-  2004-09-20 - added support for a new device (Compro DVB-U2000), thanks
-               to Amaury Demol for reporting
-             - changed usb TS transfer method (several urbs, stopping transfer
-               before setting a new pid)
-  2004-09-13 - added support for a new device (Artec T1 USB TVBOX), thanks
-               to Christian Motschke for reporting
-  2004-09-05 - released the dibusb device and dib3000mb-frontend driver
-
-  (old news for vp7041.c)
-  2004-07-15 - found out, by accident, that the device has a TUA6010XS for
-               PLL
-  2004-07-12 - figured out, that the driver should also work with the
-               CTS Portable (Chinese Television System)
-  2004-07-08 - firmware-extraction-2.422-problem solved, driver is now working
-               properly with firmware extracted from 2.422
-			 - #if for 2.6.4 (dvb), compile issue
-			 - changed firmware handling, see vp7041.txt sec 1.1
-  2004-07-02 - some tuner modifications, v0.1, cleanups, first public
-  2004-06-28 - now using the dvb_dmx_swfilter_packets, everything
-               runs fine now
-  2004-06-27 - able to watch and switching channels (pre-alpha)
-             - no section filtering yet
-  2004-06-06 - first TS received, but kernel oops :/
-  2004-05-14 - firmware loader is working
-  2004-05-11 - start writing the driver
-
-1. How to use?
-NOTE: This driver was developed using Linux 2.6.6.,
-it is working with 2.6.7 and above.
-
-Linux 2.4.x support is not planned, but patches are very welcome.
-
-NOTE: I'm using Debian testing, so the following explaination (especially
-the hotplug-path) needn't match your system, but probably it will :).
-
-The driver is included in the kernel since Linux 2.6.10.
-
-1.1. Firmware
-
-The USB driver needs to download a firmware to start working.
-
-You can either use "get_dvb_firmware dibusb" to download the firmware or you
-can get it directly via
-
-for USB1.1 (AN2135)
-http://www.linuxtv.org/downloads/firmware/dvb-dibusb-5.0.0.11.fw
-
-for USB1.1 (AN2235) (a few Artec T1 devices)
-http://www.linuxtv.org/downloads/firmware/dvb-dibusb-an2235-1.fw
-
-for USB2.0 (FX2) Hauppauge, DiBcom
-http://www.linuxtv.org/downloads/firmware/dvb-dibusb-6.0.0.5.fw
-
-for USB2.0 ADSTech/Kworld USB2.0
-http://www.linuxtv.org/downloads/firmware/dvb-dibusb-adstech-usb2-1.fw
-
-for USB2.0 HanfTek
-http://www.linuxtv.org/downloads/firmware/dvb-dibusb-an2235-1.fw
-
-
-1.2. Compiling
-
-Since the driver is in the linux kernel, activating the driver in
-your favorite config-environment should sufficient. I recommend
-to compile the driver as module. Hotplug does the rest.
-
-1.3. Loading the drivers
-
-Hotplug is able to load the driver, when it is needed (because you plugged
-in the device).
-
-If you want to enable debug output, you have to load the driver manually and
-from withing the dvb-kernel cvs repository.
-
-first have a look, which debug level are available:
-
-modinfo dib3000mb
-modinfo dib3000-common
-modinfo dib3000mc
-modinfo dvb-dibusb
-
-modprobe dib3000-common debug=<level>
-modprobe dib3000mb debug=<level>
-modprobe dib3000mc debug=<level>
-modprobe dvb-dibusb debug=<level>
-
-should do the trick.
-
-When the driver is loaded successfully, the firmware file was in
-the right place and the device is connected, the "Power"-LED should be
-turned on.
-
-At this point you should be able to start a dvb-capable application. For myself
-I used mplayer, dvbscan, tzap and kaxtv, they are working. Using the device
-in vdr is working now also.
-
-2. Known problems and bugs
-
-- Don't remove the USB device while running an DVB application, your system will die.
-
-2.1. Adding support for devices
-
-It is not possible to determine the range of devices based on the DiBcom
-reference designs. This is because the reference design of DiBcom can be sold
-to thirds, without telling DiBcom (so done with the Twinhan VP7041 and
-the HAMA device).
-
-When you think you have a device like this and the driver does not recognizes it,
-please send the ****load*.inf and the ****cap*.inf of the Windows driver to me.
-
-Sometimes the Vendor or Product ID is identical to the ones of Twinhan, even
-though it is not a Twinhan device (e.g. HAMA), then please send me the name
-of the device. I will add it to this list in order to make this clear to
-others.
-
-If you are familar with C you can also add the VID and PID of the device to
-the dvb-dibusb-core.c-file and create a patch and send it over to me or to
-the linux-dvb mailing list, _after_ you have tried compiling and modprobing
-it.
-
-2.2. USB1.1 Bandwidth limitation
-
-Most of the currently supported devices are USB1.1 and thus they have a
-maximum bandwidth of about 5-6 MBit/s when connected to a USB2.0 hub.
-This is not enough for receiving the complete transport stream of a
-DVB-T channel (which can be about 16 MBit/s). Normally this is not a
-problem, if you only want to watch TV (this does not apply for HDTV),
-but watching a channel while recording another channel on the same
-frequency simply does not work very well. This applies to all USB1.1
-DVB-T devices, not just dibusb)
-
-Update: For the USB1.1 and VDR some work has been done (patches and comments
-are still very welcome). Maybe the problem is solved in the meantime because I
-now use the dmx_sw_filter function instead of dmx_sw_filter_packet. I hope the
-linux-dvb software filter is able to get the best of the garbled TS.
-
-The bug, where the TS is distorted by a heavy usage of the device is gone
-definitely. All dibusb-devices I was using (Twinhan, Kworld, DiBcom) are
-working like charm now with VDR. Sometimes I even was able to record a channel
-and watch another one.
-
-2.3. Comments
-
-Patches, comments and suggestions are very very welcome.
-
-3. Acknowledgements
-	Amaury Demol (ademol@dibcom.fr) and Francois Kanounnikoff from DiBcom for
-    providing specs, code and help, on which the dvb-dibusb, dib3000mb and
-    dib3000mc are based.
-
-   David Matthews for identifying a new device type (Artec T1 with AN2235)
-    and for extending dibusb with remote control event handling. Thank you.
-
-   Alex Woods for frequently answering question about usb and dvb
-    stuff, a big thank you.
-
-   Bernd Wagner for helping with huge bug reports and discussions.
-
-   Gunnar Wittich and Joachim von Caron for their trust for giving me
-    root-shells on their machines to implement support for new devices.
-
-   Some guys on the linux-dvb mailing list for encouraging me
-
-   Peter Schildmann >peter.schildmann-nospam-at-web.de< for his
-    user-level firmware loader, which saves a lot of time
-    (when writing the vp7041 driver)
-
-   Ulf Hermenau for helping me out with traditional chinese.
-
-   Andr<64> Smoktun and Christian Fr<46>mmel for supporting me with
-    hardware and listening to my problems very patient

Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb

@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+Documentation for dvb-usb-framework module and its devices
+
+Idea behind the dvb-usb-framework
+=================================
+
+In March 2005 I got the new Twinhan USB2.0 DVB-T device. They provided specs and a firmware.
+
+Quite keen I wanted to put the driver (with some quirks of course) into dibusb.
+After reading some specs and doing some USB snooping, it realized, that the
+dibusb-driver would be a complete mess afterwards. So I decided to do it in a
+different way: With the help of a dvb-usb-framework.
+
+The framework provides generic functions (mostly kernel API calls), such as:
+
+- Transport Stream URB handling in conjunction with dvb-demux-feed-control
+  (bulk and isoc are supported)
+- registering the device for the DVB-API
+- registering an I2C-adapter if applicable
+- remote-control/input-device handling
+- firmware requesting and loading (currently just for the Cypress USB
+  controllers)
+- other functions/methods which can be shared by several drivers (such as
+  functions for bulk-control-commands)
+- TODO: a I2C-chunker. It creates device-specific chunks of register-accesses
+  depending on length of a register and the number of values that can be
+  multi-written and multi-read.
+
+The source code of the particular DVB USB devices does just the communication
+with the device via the bus. The connection between the DVB-API-functionality
+is done via callbacks, assigned in a static device-description (struct
+dvb_usb_device) each device-driver has to have.
+
+For an example have a look in drivers/media/dvb/dvb-usb/vp7045*.
+
+Objective is to migrate all the usb-devices (dibusb, cinergyT2, maybe the
+ttusb; flexcop-usb already benefits from the generic flexcop-device) to use
+the dvb-usb-lib.
+
+TODO: dynamic enabling and disabling of the pid-filter in regard to number of
+feeds requested.
+
+Supported devices
+========================
+
+See the LinuxTV DVB Wiki at www.linuxtv.org for a complete list of
+cards/drivers/firmwares:
+
+http://www.linuxtv.org/wiki/index.php/DVB_USB
+
+0. History & News:
+  2005-06-30 - added support for WideView WT-220U (Thanks to Steve Chang)
+  2005-05-30 - added basic isochronous support to the dvb-usb-framework
+               added support for Conexant Hybrid reference design and Nebula DigiTV USB
+  2005-04-17 - all dibusb devices ported to make use of the dvb-usb-framework
+  2005-04-02 - re-enabled and improved remote control code.
+  2005-03-31 - ported the Yakumo/Hama/Typhoon DVB-T USB2.0 device to dvb-usb.
+  2005-03-30 - first commit of the dvb-usb-module based on the dibusb-source. First device is a new driver for the
+               TwinhanDTV Alpha / MagicBox II USB2.0-only DVB-T device.
+
+  (change from dvb-dibusb to dvb-usb)
+  2005-03-28 - added support for the AVerMedia AverTV DVB-T USB2.0 device (Thanks to Glen Harris and Jiun-Kuei Jung, AVerMedia)
+  2005-03-14 - added support for the Typhoon/Yakumo/HAMA DVB-T mobile USB2.0
+  2005-02-11 - added support for the KWorld/ADSTech Instant DVB-T USB2.0. Thanks a lot to Joachim von Caron
+  2005-02-02 - added support for the Hauppauge Win-TV Nova-T USB2
+  2005-01-31 - distorted streaming is gone for USB1.1 devices
+  2005-01-13 - moved the mirrored pid_filter_table back to dvb-dibusb
+             - first almost working version for HanfTek UMT-010
+             - found out, that Yakumo/HAMA/Typhoon are predecessors of the HanfTek UMT-010
+  2005-01-10 - refactoring completed, now everything is very delightful
+             - tuner quirks for some weird devices (Artec T1 AN2235 device has sometimes a
+               Panasonic Tuner assembled). Tunerprobing implemented. Thanks a lot to Gunnar Wittich.
+  2004-12-29 - after several days of struggling around bug of no returning URBs fixed.
+  2004-12-26 - refactored the dibusb-driver, splitted into separate files
+             - i2c-probing enabled
+  2004-12-06 - possibility for demod i2c-address probing
+             - new usb IDs (Compro, Artec)
+  2004-11-23 - merged changes from DiB3000MC_ver2.1
+             - revised the debugging
+             - possibility to deliver the complete TS for USB2.0
+  2004-11-21 - first working version of the dib3000mc/p frontend driver.
+  2004-11-12 - added additional remote control keys. Thanks to Uwe Hanke.
+  2004-11-07 - added remote control support. Thanks to David Matthews.
+  2004-11-05 - added support for a new devices (Grandtec/Avermedia/Artec)
+             - merged my changes (for dib3000mb/dibusb) to the FE_REFACTORING, because it became HEAD
+             - moved transfer control (pid filter, fifo control) from usb driver to frontend, it seems
+               better settled there (added xfer_ops-struct)
+             - created a common files for frontends (mc/p/mb)
+  2004-09-28 - added support for a new device (Unkown, vendor ID is Hyper-Paltek)
+  2004-09-20 - added support for a new device (Compro DVB-U2000), thanks
+               to Amaury Demol for reporting
+             - changed usb TS transfer method (several urbs, stopping transfer
+               before setting a new pid)
+  2004-09-13 - added support for a new device (Artec T1 USB TVBOX), thanks
+               to Christian Motschke for reporting
+  2004-09-05 - released the dibusb device and dib3000mb-frontend driver
+
+  (old news for vp7041.c)
+  2004-07-15 - found out, by accident, that the device has a TUA6010XS for
+               PLL
+  2004-07-12 - figured out, that the driver should also work with the
+               CTS Portable (Chinese Television System)
+  2004-07-08 - firmware-extraction-2.422-problem solved, driver is now working
+               properly with firmware extracted from 2.422
+             - #if for 2.6.4 (dvb), compile issue
+             - changed firmware handling, see vp7041.txt sec 1.1
+  2004-07-02 - some tuner modifications, v0.1, cleanups, first public
+  2004-06-28 - now using the dvb_dmx_swfilter_packets, everything
+               runs fine now
+  2004-06-27 - able to watch and switching channels (pre-alpha)
+             - no section filtering yet
+  2004-06-06 - first TS received, but kernel oops :/
+  2004-05-14 - firmware loader is working
+  2004-05-11 - start writing the driver
+
+1. How to use?
+1.1. Firmware
+
+Most of the USB drivers need to download a firmware to the device before start
+working.
+
+Have a look at the Wikipage for the DVB-USB-drivers to find out, which firmware
+you need for your device:
+
+http://www.linuxtv.org/wiki/index.php/DVB_USB
+
+1.2. Compiling
+
+Since the driver is in the linux kernel, activating the driver in
+your favorite config-environment should sufficient. I recommend
+to compile the driver as module. Hotplug does the rest.
+
+If you use dvb-kernel enter the build-2.6 directory run 'make' and 'insmod.sh
+load' afterwards.
+
+1.3. Loading the drivers
+
+Hotplug is able to load the driver, when it is needed (because you plugged
+in the device).
+
+If you want to enable debug output, you have to load the driver manually and
+from withing the dvb-kernel cvs repository.
+
+first have a look, which debug level are available:
+
+modinfo dvb-usb
+modinfo dvb-usb-vp7045
+etc.
+
+modprobe dvb-usb debug=<level>
+modprobe dvb-usb-vp7045 debug=<level>
+etc.
+
+should do the trick.
+
+When the driver is loaded successfully, the firmware file was in
+the right place and the device is connected, the "Power"-LED should be
+turned on.
+
+At this point you should be able to start a dvb-capable application. I'm use
+(t|s)zap, mplayer and dvbscan to test the basics. VDR-xine provides the
+long-term test scenario.
+
+2. Known problems and bugs
+
+- Don't remove the USB device while running an DVB application, your system
+  will go crazy or die most likely.
+
+2.1. Adding support for devices
+
+TODO
+
+2.2. USB1.1 Bandwidth limitation
+
+A lot of the currently supported devices are USB1.1 and thus they have a
+maximum bandwidth of about 5-6 MBit/s when connected to a USB2.0 hub.
+This is not enough for receiving the complete transport stream of a
+DVB-T channel (which is about 16 MBit/s). Normally this is not a
+problem, if you only want to watch TV (this does not apply for HDTV),
+but watching a channel while recording another channel on the same
+frequency simply does not work very well. This applies to all USB1.1
+DVB-T devices, not just the dvb-usb-devices)
+
+The bug, where the TS is distorted by a heavy usage of the device is gone
+definitely. All dvb-usb-devices I was using (Twinhan, Kworld, DiBcom) are
+working like charm now with VDR. Sometimes I even was able to record a channel
+and watch another one.
+
+2.3. Comments
+
+Patches, comments and suggestions are very very welcome.
+
+3. Acknowledgements
+   Amaury Demol (ademol@dibcom.fr) and Francois Kanounnikoff from DiBcom for
+    providing specs, code and help, on which the dvb-dibusb, dib3000mb and
+    dib3000mc are based.
+
+   David Matthews for identifying a new device type (Artec T1 with AN2235)
+    and for extending dibusb with remote control event handling. Thank you.
+
+   Alex Woods for frequently answering question about usb and dvb
+    stuff, a big thank you.
+
+   Bernd Wagner for helping with huge bug reports and discussions.
+
+   Gunnar Wittich and Joachim von Caron for their trust for providing
+    root-shells on their machines to implement support for new devices.
+
+   Allan Third and Michael Hutchinson for their help to write the Nebula
+    digitv-driver.
+
+   Glen Harris for bringing up, that there is a new dibusb-device and Jiun-Kuei
+    Jung from AVerMedia who kindly provided a special firmware to get the device
+    up and running in Linux.
+
+   Jennifer Chen, Jeff and Jack from Twinhan for kindly supporting by
+	writing the vp7045-driver.
+
+   Steve Chang from WideView for providing information for new devices and
+	firmware files.
+
+   Michael Paxton for submitting remote control keymaps.
+
+   Some guys on the linux-dvb mailing list for encouraging me.
+
+   Peter Schildmann >peter.schildmann-nospam-at-web.de< for his
+    user-level firmware loader, which saves a lot of time
+    (when writing the vp7041 driver)
+
+   Ulf Hermenau for helping me out with traditional chinese.
+
+   Andr<64> Smoktun and Christian Fr<46>mmel for supporting me with
+    hardware and listening to my problems very patiently.

Documentation/dvb/bt8xx.txt

@@ -1,69 +1,55 @@
-How to get the Nebula, PCTV and Twinhan DST cards working
-=========================================================
+How to get the Nebula Electronics DigiTV, Pinnacle PCTV Sat, Twinhan DST + clones working
+=========================================================================================
 
-This class of cards has a bt878a as the PCI interface, and
-require the bttv driver.
+1) General information
+======================
 
-Please pay close attention to the warning about the bttv module
-options below for the DST card.
+This class of cards has a bt878a chip as the PCI interface.
+The different card drivers require the bttv driver to provide the means
+to access the i2c bus and the gpio pins of the bt8xx chipset.
 
-1) General informations
-=======================
+2) Compilation rules for Kernel >= 2.6.12
+=========================================
 
-These drivers require the bttv driver to provide the means to access
-the i2c bus and the gpio pins of the bt8xx chipset.
+Enable the following options:
 
-Because of this, you need to enable
 "Device drivers" => "Multimedia devices"
-  => "Video For Linux" => "BT848 Video For Linux"
-
-Furthermore you need to enable
+ => "Video For Linux" => "BT848 Video For Linux"
 "Device drivers" => "Multimedia devices" => "Digital Video Broadcasting Devices"
-  => "DVB for Linux" "DVB Core Support" "Nebula/Pinnacle PCTV/TwinHan PCI Cards"
+ => "DVB for Linux" "DVB Core Support" "Nebula/Pinnacle PCTV/TwinHan PCI Cards"
 
-2) Loading Modules
-==================
+3) Loading Modules, described by two approaches
+===============================================
 
 In general you need to load the bttv driver, which will handle the gpio and
-i2c communication for us, plus the common dvb-bt8xx device driver.
-The frontends for Nebula (nxt6000), Pinnacle PCTV (cx24110) and
-TwinHan (dst) are loaded automatically by the dvb-bt8xx device driver.
+i2c communication for us, plus the common dvb-bt8xx device driver,
+which is called the backend.
+The frontends for Nebula DigiTV (nxt6000), Pinnacle PCTV Sat (cx24110),
+TwinHan DST + clones (dst and dst-ca) are loaded automatically by the backend.
+For further details about TwinHan DST + clones see /Documentation/dvb/ci.txt.
 
-3a) Nebula / Pinnacle PCTV
+3a) The manual approach
+-----------------------
+
+Loading modules:
+modprobe bttv
+modprobe dvb-bt8xx
+
+Unloading modules:
+modprobe -r dvb-bt8xx
+modprobe -r bttv
+
+3b) The automatic approach
 --------------------------
 
-   $ modprobe bttv (normally bttv is being loaded automatically by kmod)
-   $ modprobe dvb-bt8xx (or just place dvb-bt8xx in /etc/modules for automatic loading)
+If not already done by installation, place a line either in
+/etc/modules.conf or in /etc/modprobe.conf containing this text:
+alias char-major-81	bttv
 
+Then place a line in /etc/modules containing this text:
+dvb-bt8xx
 
-3b) TwinHan and Clones
---------------------------
-
-   $ modprobe bttv i2c_hw=1 card=0x71
-   $ modprobe dvb-bt8xx
-   $ modprobe dst
-
-The value 0x71 will override the PCI type detection for dvb-bt8xx,
-which  is necessary for TwinHan cards.
-
-If you're having an older card (blue color circuit) and card=0x71 locks
-your machine, try using 0x68, too. If that does not work, ask on the
-mailing list.
-
-The DST module takes a couple of useful parameters.
-
-verbose takes values 0 to 5. These values control the verbosity level.
-
-debug takes values 0 and 1. You can either disable or enable debugging.
-
-dst_addons takes values 0 and 0x20. A value of 0 means it is a FTA card.
-0x20 means it has a Conditional Access slot.
-
-The autodected values are determined bythe cards 'response
-string' which you can see in your logs e.g.
-
-dst_get_device_id: Recognise [DSTMCI]
-
+Reboot your system and have fun!
 
 --
-Authors: Richard Walker, Jamie Honan, Michael Hunold, Manu Abraham
+Authors: Richard Walker, Jamie Honan, Michael Hunold, Manu Abraham, Uwe Bugla

Documentation/fb/intelfb.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+Intel 830M/845G/852GM/855GM/865G/915G Framebuffer driver
+================================================================
+
+A. Introduction
+	This is a framebuffer driver for various Intel 810/815 compatible
+graphics devices.  These would include:
+
+	Intel 830M
+	Intel 810E845G
+	Intel 852GM
+	Intel 855GM
+	Intel 865G
+	Intel 915G
+
+B.  List of available options
+
+   a. "video=intelfb"
+	enables the intelfb driver
+
+	Recommendation: required
+
+   b. "mode=<xres>x<yres>[-<bpp>][@<refresh>]"
+	select mode
+
+	Recommendation: user preference
+	(default = 1024x768-32@70)
+
+   c. "vram=<value>"
+	select amount of system RAM in MB to allocate for the video memory
+	if not enough RAM was already allocated by the BIOS.
+
+	Recommendation: 1 - 4 MB.
+	(default = 4 MB)
+
+   d. "voffset=<value>"
+        select at what offset in MB of the logical memory to allocate the
+	framebuffer memory.  The intent is to avoid the memory blocks
+	used by standard graphics applications (XFree86). Depending on your
+        usage, adjust the value up or down, (0 for maximum usage, 63/127 MB
+        for the least amount).  Note, an arbitrary setting may conflict
+        with XFree86.
+
+	Recommendation: do not set
+	(default = 48 MB)
+
+   e. "accel"
+	enable text acceleration.  This can be enabled/reenabled anytime
+	by using 'fbset -accel true/false'.
+
+	Recommendation: enable
+	(default = set)
+
+   f. "hwcursor"
+	enable cursor acceleration.
+
+	Recommendation: enable
+	(default = set)
+
+   g. "mtrr"
+	enable MTRR.  This allows data transfers to the framebuffer memory
+	to occur in bursts which can significantly increase performance.
+	Not very helpful with the intel chips because of 'shared memory'.
+
+	Recommendation: set
+	(default = set)
+
+   h. "fixed"
+	disable mode switching.
+
+	Recommendation: do not set
+	(default = not set)
+
+   The binary parameters can be unset with a "no" prefix, example "noaccel".
+   The default parameter (not named) is the mode.
+
+C. Kernel booting
+
+Separate each option/option-pair by commas (,) and the option from its value
+with an equals sign (=) as in the following:
+
+video=i810fb:option1,option2=value2
+
+Sample Usage
+------------
+
+In /etc/lilo.conf, add the line:
+
+append="video=intelfb:800x600-32@75,accel,hwcursor,vram=8"
+
+This will initialize the framebuffer to 800x600 at 32bpp and 75Hz. The
+framebuffer will use 8 MB of System RAM. hw acceleration of text and cursor
+will be enabled.
+
+D.  Module options
+
+	The module parameters are essentially similar to the kernel
+parameters. The main difference is that you need to include a Boolean value
+(1 for TRUE, and 0 for FALSE) for those options which don't need a value.
+
+Example, to enable MTRR, include "mtrr=1".
+
+Sample Usage
+------------
+
+Using the same setup as described above, load the module like this:
+
+	modprobe intelfb mode=800x600-32@75 vram=8 accel=1 hwcursor=1
+
+Or just add the following to /etc/modprobe.conf
+
+	options intelfb mode=800x600-32@75 vram=8 accel=1 hwcursor=1
+
+and just do a
+
+	modprobe intelfb
+
+
+E.  Acknowledgment:
+
+	1.  Geert Uytterhoeven - his excellent howto and the virtual
+                                 framebuffer driver code made this possible.
+
+	2.  Jeff Hartmann for his agpgart code.
+
+	3.  David Dawes for his original kernel 2.4 code.
+
+	4.  The X developers.  Insights were provided just by reading the
+	    XFree86 source code.
+
+	5.  Antonino A. Daplas for his inspiring i810fb driver.
+
+	6.  Andrew Morton for his kernel patches maintenance.
+
+###########################
+Sylvain

Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt

@@ -144,7 +144,21 @@ vgapal	Use the standard vga registers for palette changes.
 	This is the default.
 pmipal	Use the protected mode interface for palette changes.
 
-mtrr	setup memory type range registers for the vesafb framebuffer.
+mtrr:n	setup memory type range registers for the vesafb framebuffer
+	where n:
+	      0 - disabled (equivalent to nomtrr)
+	      1 - uncachable
+	      2 - write-back
+	      3 - write-combining (default)
+	      4 - write-through
+
+	If you see the following in dmesg, choose the type that matches the
+	old one. In this example, use "mtrr:2".
+...
+mtrr: type mismatch for e0000000,8000000 old: write-back new: write-combining
+...
+
+nomtrr  disable mtrr
 
 vremap:n
         remap 'n' MiB of video RAM. If 0 or not specified, remap memory

Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt

@@ -43,6 +43,14 @@ Who:	Randy Dunlap <rddunlap@osdl.org>
 
 ---------------------------
 
+What:	RAW driver (CONFIG_RAW_DRIVER)
+When:	December 2005
+Why:	declared obsolete since kernel 2.6.3
+	O_DIRECT can be used instead
+Who:	Adrian Bunk <bunk@stusta.de>
+
+---------------------------
+
 What:	register_ioctl32_conversion() / unregister_ioctl32_conversion()
 When:	April 2005
 Why:	Replaced by ->compat_ioctl in file_operations and other method
@@ -66,6 +74,14 @@ Who:	Paul E. McKenney <paulmck@us.ibm.com>
 
 ---------------------------
 
+What:	remove verify_area()
+When:	July 2006
+Files:	Various uaccess.h headers.
+Why:	Deprecated and redundant. access_ok() should be used instead.
+Who:	Jesper Juhl <juhl-lkml@dif.dk>
+
+---------------------------
+
 What:	IEEE1394 Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol driver,
 	Connection Management Procedures driver
 When:	November 2005
@@ -83,3 +99,39 @@ Why:	Deprecated in favour of the new ioctl-based rawiso interface, which is
 	more efficient.  You should really be using libraw1394 for raw1394
 	access anyway.
 Who:	Jody McIntyre <scjody@steamballoon.com>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	register_serial/unregister_serial
+When:	September 2005
+Why:	This interface does not allow serial ports to be registered against
+	a struct device, and as such does not allow correct power management
+	of such ports.  8250-based ports should use serial8250_register_port
+	and serial8250_unregister_port, or platform devices instead.
+Who:	Russell King <rmk@arm.linux.org.uk>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	i2c sysfs name change: in1_ref, vid deprecated in favour of cpu0_vid
+When:	November 2005
+Files:	drivers/i2c/chips/adm1025.c, drivers/i2c/chips/adm1026.c
+Why:	Match the other drivers' name for the same function, duplicate names
+	will be available until removal of old names.
+Who:	Grant Coady <gcoady@gmail.com>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	PCMCIA control ioctl (needed for pcmcia-cs [cardmgr, cardctl])
+When:	November 2005
+Files:	drivers/pcmcia/: pcmcia_ioctl.c
+Why:	With the 16-bit PCMCIA subsystem now behaving (almost) like a
+	normal hotpluggable bus, and with it using the default kernel
+	infrastructure (hotplug, driver core, sysfs) keeping the PCMCIA
+	control ioctl needed by cardmgr and cardctl from pcmcia-cs is
+	unnecessary, and makes further cleanups and integration of the
+	PCMCIA subsystem into the Linux kernel device driver model more
+	difficult. The features provided by cardmgr and cardctl are either
+	handled by the kernel itself now or are available in the new
+	pcmciautils package available at
+	http://kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/pcmcia/
+Who:	Dominik Brodowski <linux@brodo.de>

Documentation/filesystems/ext2.txt

@@ -58,6 +58,8 @@ noacl				Don't support POSIX ACLs.
 
 nobh				Do not attach buffer_heads to file pagecache.
 
+xip				Use execute in place (no caching) if possible
+
 grpquota,noquota,quota,usrquota	Quota options are silently ignored by ext2.
 
 

Documentation/filesystems/inotify.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+				   inotify
+	    a powerful yet simple file change notification system
+
+
+
+Document started 15 Mar 2005 by Robert Love <rml@novell.com>
+
+
+(i) User Interface
+
+Inotify is controlled by a set of three system calls and normal file I/O on a
+returned file descriptor.
+
+First step in using inotify is to initialise an inotify instance:
+
+	int fd = inotify_init ();
+
+Each instance is associated with a unique, ordered queue.
+
+Change events are managed by "watches".  A watch is an (object,mask) pair where
+the object is a file or directory and the mask is a bit mask of one or more
+inotify events that the application wishes to receive.  See <linux/inotify.h>
+for valid events.  A watch is referenced by a watch descriptor, or wd.
+
+Watches are added via a path to the file.
+
+Watches on a directory will return events on any files inside of the directory.
+
+Adding a watch is simple:
+
+	int wd = inotify_add_watch (fd, path, mask);
+
+Where "fd" is the return value from inotify_init(), path is the path to the
+object to watch, and mask is the watch mask (see <linux/inotify.h>).
+
+You can update an existing watch in the same manner, by passing in a new mask.
+
+An existing watch is removed via
+
+	int ret = inotify_rm_watch (fd, wd);
+
+Events are provided in the form of an inotify_event structure that is read(2)
+from a given inotify instance.  The filename is of dynamic length and follows
+the struct. It is of size len.  The filename is padded with null bytes to
+ensure proper alignment.  This padding is reflected in len.
+
+You can slurp multiple events by passing a large buffer, for example
+
+	size_t len = read (fd, buf, BUF_LEN);
+
+Where "buf" is a pointer to an array of "inotify_event" structures at least
+BUF_LEN bytes in size.  The above example will return as many events as are
+available and fit in BUF_LEN.
+
+Each inotify instance fd is also select()- and poll()-able.
+
+You can find the size of the current event queue via the standard FIONREAD
+ioctl on the fd returned by inotify_init().
+
+All watches are destroyed and cleaned up on close.
+
+
+(ii)
+
+Prototypes:
+
+	int inotify_init (void);
+	int inotify_add_watch (int fd, const char *path, __u32 mask);
+	int inotify_rm_watch (int fd, __u32 mask);
+
+
+(iii) Internal Kernel Implementation
+
+Each inotify instance is associated with an inotify_device structure.
+
+Each watch is associated with an inotify_watch structure.  Watches are chained
+off of each associated device and each associated inode.
+
+See fs/inotify.c for the locking and lifetime rules.
+
+
+(iv) Rationale
+
+Q: What is the design decision behind not tying the watch to the open fd of
+   the watched object?
+
+A: Watches are associated with an open inotify device, not an open file.
+   This solves the primary problem with dnotify: keeping the file open pins
+   the file and thus, worse, pins the mount.  Dnotify is therefore infeasible
+   for use on a desktop system with removable media as the media cannot be
+   unmounted.  Watching a file should not require that it be open.
+
+Q: What is the design decision behind using an-fd-per-instance as opposed to
+   an fd-per-watch?
+
+A: An fd-per-watch quickly consumes more file descriptors than are allowed,
+   more fd's than are feasible to manage, and more fd's than are optimally
+   select()-able.  Yes, root can bump the per-process fd limit and yes, users
+   can use epoll, but requiring both is a silly and extraneous requirement.
+   A watch consumes less memory than an open file, separating the number
+   spaces is thus sensible.  The current design is what user-space developers
+   want: Users initialize inotify, once, and add n watches, requiring but one
+   fd and no twiddling with fd limits.  Initializing an inotify instance two
+   thousand times is silly.  If we can implement user-space's preferences 
+   cleanly--and we can, the idr layer makes stuff like this trivial--then we 
+   should.
+
+   There are other good arguments.  With a single fd, there is a single
+   item to block on, which is mapped to a single queue of events.  The single
+   fd returns all watch events and also any potential out-of-band data.  If
+   every fd was a separate watch,
+
+   - There would be no way to get event ordering.  Events on file foo and
+     file bar would pop poll() on both fd's, but there would be no way to tell
+     which happened first.  A single queue trivially gives you ordering.  Such
+     ordering is crucial to existing applications such as Beagle.  Imagine
+     "mv a b ; mv b a" events without ordering.
+
+   - We'd have to maintain n fd's and n internal queues with state,
+     versus just one.  It is a lot messier in the kernel.  A single, linear
+     queue is the data structure that makes sense.
+
+   - User-space developers prefer the current API.  The Beagle guys, for
+     example, love it.  Trust me, I asked.  It is not a surprise: Who'd want
+     to manage and block on 1000 fd's via select?
+
+   - No way to get out of band data.
+
+   - 1024 is still too low.  ;-)
+
+   When you talk about designing a file change notification system that
+   scales to 1000s of directories, juggling 1000s of fd's just does not seem
+   the right interface.  It is too heavy.
+
+   Additionally, it _is_ possible to  more than one instance  and
+   juggle more than one queue and thus more than one associated fd.  There
+   need not be a one-fd-per-process mapping; it is one-fd-per-queue and a
+   process can easily want more than one queue.
+
+Q: Why the system call approach?
+
+A: The poor user-space interface is the second biggest problem with dnotify.
+   Signals are a terrible, terrible interface for file notification.  Or for
+   anything, for that matter.  The ideal solution, from all perspectives, is a
+   file descriptor-based one that allows basic file I/O and poll/select.
+   Obtaining the fd and managing the watches could have been done either via a
+   device file or a family of new system calls.  We decided to implement a
+   family of system calls because that is the preffered approach for new kernel
+   interfaces.  The only real difference was whether we wanted to use open(2)
+   and ioctl(2) or a couple of new system calls.  System calls beat ioctls.
+

Documentation/filesystems/isofs.txt

@@ -26,7 +26,11 @@ Mount options unique to the isofs filesystem.
   mode=xxx      Sets the permissions on files to xxx
   nojoliet      Ignore Joliet extensions if they are present.
   norock        Ignore Rock Ridge extensions if they are present.
-  unhide        Show hidden files.
+  hide		Completely strip hidden files from the file system.
+  showassoc	Show files marked with the 'associated' bit
+  unhide	Deprecated; showing hidden files is now default;
+		If given, it is a synonym for 'showassoc' which will
+		recreate previous unhide behavior
   session=x     Select number of session on multisession CD
   sbsector=xxx  Session begins from sector xxx
 

Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt

@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ Overview
 ========
 
 Linux-NTFS comes with a number of user-space programs known as ntfsprogs.
-These include mkntfs, a full-featured ntfs file system format utility,
+These include mkntfs, a full-featured ntfs filesystem format utility,
 ntfsundelete used for recovering files that were unintentionally deleted
 from an NTFS volume and ntfsresize which is used to resize an NTFS partition.
 See the web site for more information.
@@ -149,7 +149,14 @@ case_sensitive=<BOOL>	If case_sensitive is specified, treat all file names as
 			name, if it exists.  If case_sensitive, you will need
 			to provide the correct case of the short file name.
 
-errors=opt		What to do when critical file system errors are found.
+disable_sparse=<BOOL>	If disable_sparse is specified, creation of sparse
+			regions, i.e. holes, inside files is disabled for the
+			volume (for the duration of this mount only).  By
+			default, creation of sparse regions is enabled, which
+			is consistent with the behaviour of traditional Unix
+			filesystems.
+
+errors=opt		What to do when critical filesystem errors are found.
 			Following values can be used for "opt":
 			  continue: DEFAULT, try to clean-up as much as
 				    possible, e.g. marking a corrupt inode as
@@ -432,6 +439,24 @@ ChangeLog
 
 Note, a technical ChangeLog aimed at kernel hackers is in fs/ntfs/ChangeLog.
 
+2.1.23:
+	- Stamp the user space journal, aka transaction log, aka $UsnJrnl, if
+	  it is present and active thus telling Windows and applications using
+	  the transaction log that changes can have happened on the volume
+	  which are not recorded in $UsnJrnl.
+	- Detect the case when Windows has been hibernated (suspended to disk)
+	  and if this is the case do not allow (re)mounting read-write to
+	  prevent data corruption when you boot back into the suspended
+	  Windows session.
+	- Implement extension of resident files using the normal file write
+	  code paths, i.e. most very small files can be extended to be a little
+	  bit bigger but not by much.
+	- Add new mount option "disable_sparse".  (See list of mount options
+	  above for details.)
+	- Improve handling of ntfs volumes with errors and strange boot sectors
+	  in particular.
+	- Fix various bugs including a nasty deadlock that appeared in recent
+	  kernels (around 2.6.11-2.6.12 timeframe).
 2.1.22:
 	- Improve handling of ntfs volumes with errors.
 	- Fix various bugs and race conditions.

Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt

@@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Other notes:
 
 A very simple (and naive) implementation of a device attribute is:
 
-static ssize_t show_name(struct device * dev, char * buf)
+static ssize_t show_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, char *buf)
 {
         return sprintf(buf,"%s\n",dev->name);
 }

Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.txt

@@ -71,8 +71,8 @@ can be changed on remount.  The size parameter also accepts a suffix %
 to limit this tmpfs instance to that percentage of your physical RAM:
 the default, when neither size nor nr_blocks is specified, is size=50%
 
-If both nr_blocks (or size) and nr_inodes are set to 0, neither blocks
-nor inodes will be limited in that instance.  It is generally unwise to
+If nr_blocks=0 (or size=0), blocks will not be limited in that instance;
+if nr_inodes=0, inodes will not be limited.  It is generally unwise to
 mount with such options, since it allows any user with write access to
 use up all the memory on the machine; but enhances the scalability of
 that instance in a system with many cpus making intensive use of it.
@@ -97,4 +97,4 @@ RAM/SWAP in 10240 inodes and it is only accessible by root.
 Author:
    Christoph Rohland <cr@sap.com>, 1.12.01
 Updated:
-   Hugh Dickins <hugh@veritas.com>, 01 September 2004
+   Hugh Dickins <hugh@veritas.com>, 13 March 2005

Documentation/filesystems/xip.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+Execute-in-place for file mappings
+----------------------------------
+
+Motivation
+----------
+File mappings are performed by mapping page cache pages to userspace. In
+addition, read&write type file operations also transfer data from/to the page
+cache.
+
+For memory backed storage devices that use the block device interface, the page
+cache pages are in fact copies of the original storage. Various approaches
+exist to work around the need for an extra copy. The ramdisk driver for example
+does read the data into the page cache, keeps a reference, and discards the
+original data behind later on.
+
+Execute-in-place solves this issue the other way around: instead of keeping
+data in the page cache, the need to have a page cache copy is eliminated
+completely. With execute-in-place, read&write type operations are performed
+directly from/to the memory backed storage device. For file mappings, the
+storage device itself is mapped directly into userspace.
+
+This implementation was initialy written for shared memory segments between
+different virtual machines on s390 hardware to allow multiple machines to
+share the same binaries and libraries.
+
+Implementation
+--------------
+Execute-in-place is implemented in three steps: block device operation,
+address space operation, and file operations.
+
+A block device operation named direct_access is used to retrieve a
+reference (pointer) to a block on-disk. The reference is supposed to be
+cpu-addressable, physical address and remain valid until the release operation
+is performed. A struct block_device reference is used to address the device,
+and a sector_t argument is used to identify the individual block. As an
+alternative, memory technology devices can be used for this.
+
+The block device operation is optional, these block devices support it as of
+today:
+- dcssblk: s390 dcss block device driver
+
+An address space operation named get_xip_page is used to retrieve reference
+to a struct page. To address the target page, a reference to an address_space,
+and a sector number is provided. A 3rd argument indicates whether the
+function should allocate blocks if needed.
+
+This address space operation is mutually exclusive with readpage&writepage that
+do page cache read/write operations.
+The following filesystems support it as of today:
+- ext2: the second extended filesystem, see Documentation/filesystems/ext2.txt
+
+A set of file operations that do utilize get_xip_page can be found in
+mm/filemap_xip.c . The following file operation implementations are provided:
+- aio_read/aio_write
+- readv/writev
+- sendfile
+
+The generic file operations do_sync_read/do_sync_write can be used to implement
+classic synchronous IO calls.
+
+Shortcomings
+------------
+This implementation is limited to storage devices that are cpu addressable at
+all times (no highmem or such). It works well on rom/ram, but enhancements are
+needed to make it work with flash in read+write mode.
+Putting the Linux kernel and/or its modules on a xip filesystem does not mean
+they are not copied.

Documentation/hwmon/adm1021

@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+Kernel driver adm1021
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Analog Devices ADM1021
+    Prefix: 'adm1021'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+  * Analog Devices ADM1021A/ADM1023
+    Prefix: 'adm1023'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+  * Genesys Logic GL523SM
+    Prefix: 'gl523sm'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet:
+  * Intel Xeon Processor
+    Prefix: - any other - may require 'force_adm1021' parameter
+    Addresses scanned: none
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at Intel website
+  * Maxim MAX1617
+    Prefix: 'max1617'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
+  * Maxim MAX1617A
+    Prefix: 'max1617a'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
+  * National Semiconductor LM84
+    Prefix: 'lm84'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+  * Philips NE1617
+    Prefix: 'max1617' (probably detected as a max1617)
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips website
+  * Philips NE1617A
+    Prefix: 'max1617' (probably detected as a max1617)
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips website
+  * TI THMC10
+    Prefix: 'thmc10'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the TI website
+  * Onsemi MC1066
+    Prefix: 'mc1066'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Onsemi website
+
+
+Authors:
+        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+
+* read_only: int
+  Don't set any values, read only mode
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The chips supported by this driver are very similar. The Maxim MAX1617 is
+the oldest; it has the problem that it is not very well detectable. The
+MAX1617A solves that. The ADM1021 is a straight clone of the MAX1617A.
+Ditto for the THMC10. From here on, we will refer to all these chips as
+ADM1021-clones.
+
+The ADM1021 and MAX1617A reports a die code, which is a sort of revision
+code. This can help us pinpoint problems; it is not very useful
+otherwise.
+
+ADM1021-clones implement two temperature sensors. One of them is internal,
+and measures the temperature of the chip itself; the other is external and
+is realised in the form of a transistor-like device. A special alarm
+indicates whether the remote sensor is connected.
+
+Each sensor has its own low and high limits. When they are crossed, the
+corresponding alarm is set and remains on as long as the temperature stays
+out of range. Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. Measurements
+are possible between -65 and +127 degrees, with a resolution of one degree.
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may already
+have disappeared!
+
+This driver only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often
+will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. It is possible to make
+ADM1021-clones do faster measurements, but there is really no good reason
+for that.
+
+Xeon support
+------------
+
+Some Xeon processors have real max1617, adm1021, or compatible chips
+within them, with two temperature sensors.
+
+Other Xeons have chips with only one sensor.
+
+If you have a Xeon, and the adm1021 module loads, and both temperatures
+appear valid, then things are good.
+
+If the adm1021 module doesn't load, you should try this:
+	modprobe adm1021 force_adm1021=BUS,ADDRESS
+	ADDRESS can only be 0x18, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2b, 0x4c, or 0x4e.
+
+If you have dual Xeons you may have appear to have two separate
+adm1021-compatible chips, or two single-temperature sensors, at distinct
+addresses.

Documentation/hwmon/adm1025

@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+Kernel driver adm1025
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Analog Devices ADM1025, ADM1025A
+    Prefix: 'adm1025'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+  * Philips NE1619
+    Prefix: 'ne1619'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2d
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips website
+
+The NE1619 presents some differences with the original ADM1025:
+  * Only two possible addresses (0x2c - 0x2d).
+  * No temperature offset register, but we don't use it anyway.
+  * No INT mode for pin 16. We don't play with it anyway.
+
+Authors:
+        Chen-Yuan Wu <gwu@esoft.com>,
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+(This is from Analog Devices.) The ADM1025 is a complete system hardware
+monitor for microprocessor-based systems, providing measurement and limit
+comparison of various system parameters. Five voltage measurement inputs
+are provided, for monitoring +2.5V, +3.3V, +5V and +12V power supplies and
+the processor core voltage. The ADM1025 can monitor a sixth power-supply
+voltage by measuring its own VCC. One input (two pins) is dedicated to a
+remote temperature-sensing diode and an on-chip temperature sensor allows
+ambient temperature to be monitored.
+
+One specificity of this chip is that the pin 11 can be hardwired in two
+different manners. It can act as the +12V power-supply voltage analog
+input, or as the a fifth digital entry for the VID reading (bit 4). It's
+kind of strange since both are useful, and the reason for designing the
+chip that way is obscure at least to me. The bit 5 of the configuration
+register can be used to define how the chip is hardwired. Please note that
+it is not a choice you have to make as the user. The choice was already
+made by your motherboard's maker. If the configuration bit isn't set
+properly, you'll have a wrong +12V reading or a wrong VID reading. The way
+the driver handles that is to preserve this bit through the initialization
+process, assuming that the BIOS set it up properly beforehand. If it turns
+out not to be true in some cases, we'll provide a module parameter to force
+modes.
+
+This driver also supports the ADM1025A, which differs from the ADM1025
+only in that it has "open-drain VID inputs while the ADM1025 has on-chip
+100k pull-ups on the VID inputs". It doesn't make any difference for us.

Documentation/hwmon/adm1026

@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+Kernel driver adm1026
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Analog Devices ADM1026
+    Prefix: 'adm1026'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+               http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,,766_825_ADM1026,00.html
+
+Authors:
+        Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com> for Penguin Computing
+        Justin Thiessen <jthiessen@penguincomputing.com>
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+
+* gpio_input: int array (min = 1, max = 17)
+  List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as inputs
+* gpio_output: int array (min = 1, max = 17)
+  List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as outputs
+* gpio_inverted: int array (min = 1, max = 17)
+  List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as inverted
+* gpio_normal: int array (min = 1, max = 17)
+  List of GPIO pins (0-16) to program as normal/non-inverted
+* gpio_fan: int array (min = 1, max = 8)
+  List of GPIO pins (0-7) to program as fan tachs
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the Analog Devices ADM1026. Analog
+Devices calls it a "complete thermal system management controller."
+
+The ADM1026 implements three (3) temperature sensors, 17 voltage sensors,
+16 general purpose digital I/O lines, eight (8) fan speed sensors (8-bit),
+an analog output and a PWM output along with limit, alarm and mask bits for
+all of the above. There is even 8k bytes of EEPROM memory on chip.
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. There are two external
+sensor inputs and one internal sensor. Each sensor has a high and low
+limit. If the limit is exceeded, an interrupt (#SMBALERT) can be
+generated. The interrupts can be masked. In addition, there are over-temp
+limits for each sensor. If this limit is exceeded, the #THERM output will
+be asserted. The current temperature and limits have a resolution of 1
+degree.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute) but measured
+in counts of a 22.5kHz internal clock. Each fan has a high limit which
+corresponds to a minimum fan speed. If the limit is exceeded, an interrupt
+can be generated. Each fan can be programmed to divide the reference clock
+by 1, 2, 4 or 8. Not all RPM values can accurately be represented, so some
+rounding is done. With a divider of 8, the slowest measurable speed of a
+two pulse per revolution fan is 661 RPM.
+
+There are 17 voltage sensors. An alarm is triggered if the voltage has
+crossed a programmable minimum or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this
+case always means 'closest to zero'; this is important for negative voltage
+measurements. Several inputs have integrated attenuators so they can measure
+higher voltages directly. 3.3V, 5V, 12V, -12V and battery voltage all have
+dedicated inputs. There are several inputs scaled to 0-3V full-scale range
+for SCSI terminator power. The remaining inputs are not scaled and have
+a 0-2.5V full-scale range. A 2.5V or 1.82V reference voltage is provided
+for negative voltage measurements.
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may already
+have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all hardware
+registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less than 2.0
+seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily miss
+once-only alarms.
+
+The ADM1026 measures continuously. Analog inputs are measured about 4
+times a second. Fan speed measurement time depends on fan speed and
+divisor. It can take as long as 1.5 seconds to measure all fan speeds.
+
+The ADM1026 has the ability to automatically control fan speed based on the
+temperature sensor inputs. Both the PWM output and the DAC output can be
+used to control fan speed. Usually only one of these two outputs will be
+used. Write the minimum PWM or DAC value to the appropriate control
+register. Then set the low temperature limit in the tmin values for each
+temperature sensor. The range of control is fixed at 20 <20>C, and the
+largest difference between current and tmin of the temperature sensors sets
+the control output. See the datasheet for several example circuits for
+controlling fan speed with the PWM and DAC outputs. The fan speed sensors
+do not have PWM compensation, so it is probably best to control the fan
+voltage from the power lead rather than on the ground lead.
+
+The datasheet shows an example application with VID signals attached to
+GPIO lines. Unfortunately, the chip may not be connected to the VID lines
+in this way. The driver assumes that the chips *is* connected this way to
+get a VID voltage.

Documentation/hwmon/adm1031

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+Kernel driver adm1031
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Analog Devices ADM1030
+    Prefix: 'adm1030'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c to 0x2e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+               http://products.analog.com/products/info.asp?product=ADM1030
+
+  * Analog Devices ADM1031
+    Prefix: 'adm1031'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c to 0x2e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+               http://products.analog.com/products/info.asp?product=ADM1031
+
+Authors:
+        Alexandre d'Alton <alex@alexdalton.org>
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The ADM1030 and ADM1031 are digital temperature sensors and fan controllers.
+They sense their own temperature as well as the temperature of up to one
+(ADM1030) or two (ADM1031) external diodes.
+
+All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution is 0.5
+degree for the local temperature, 0.125 degree for the remote temperatures.
+
+Each temperature channel has its own high and low limits, plus a critical
+limit.
+
+The ADM1030 monitors a single fan speed, while the ADM1031 monitors up to
+two. Each fan channel has its own low speed limit.

Documentation/hwmon/adm9240

@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
+Kernel driver adm9240
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Analog Devices ADM9240
+    Prefix: 'adm9240'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+    http://www.analog.com/UploadedFiles/Data_Sheets/79857778ADM9240_0.pdf
+
+  * Dallas Semiconductor DS1780
+    Prefix: 'ds1780'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor (Maxim) website
+    http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/DS1780.pdf
+
+  * National Semiconductor LM81
+    Prefix: 'lm81'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+    http://www.national.com/ds.cgi/LM/LM81.pdf
+
+Authors:
+    Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+    Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+    Michiel Rook <michiel@grendelproject.nl>,
+    Grant Coady <gcoady@gmail.com> with guidance
+        from Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+Interface
+---------
+The I2C addresses listed above assume BIOS has not changed the
+chip MSB 5-bit address. Each chip reports a unique manufacturer
+identification code as well as the chip revision/stepping level.
+
+Description
+-----------
+[From ADM9240] The ADM9240 is a complete system hardware monitor for
+microprocessor-based systems, providing measurement and limit comparison
+of up to four power supplies and two processor core voltages, plus
+temperature, two fan speeds and chassis intrusion. Measured values can
+be read out via an I2C-compatible serial System Management Bus, and values
+for limit comparisons can be programmed in over the same serial bus. The
+high speed successive approximation ADC allows frequent sampling of all
+analog channels to ensure a fast interrupt response to any out-of-limit
+measurement.
+
+The ADM9240, DS1780 and LM81 are register compatible, the following
+details are common to the three chips. Chip differences are described
+after this section.
+
+
+Measurements
+------------
+The measurement cycle
+
+The adm9240 driver will take a measurement reading no faster than once
+each two seconds. User-space may read sysfs interface faster than the
+measurement update rate and will receive cached data from the most
+recent measurement.
+
+ADM9240 has a very fast 320us temperature and voltage measurement cycle
+with independent fan speed measurement cycles counting alternating rising
+edges of the fan tacho inputs.
+
+DS1780 measurement cycle is about once per second including fan speed.
+
+LM81 measurement cycle is about once per 400ms including fan speed.
+The LM81 12-bit extended temperature measurement mode is not supported.
+
+Temperature
+-----------
+On chip temperature is reported as degrees Celsius as 9-bit signed data
+with resolution of 0.5 degrees Celsius. High and low temperature limits
+are 8-bit signed data with resolution of one degree Celsius.
+
+Temperature alarm is asserted once the temperature exceeds the high limit,
+and is cleared when the temperature falls below the temp1_max_hyst value.
+
+Fan Speed
+---------
+Two fan tacho inputs are provided, the ADM9240 gates an internal 22.5kHz
+clock via a divider to an 8-bit counter. Fan speed (rpm) is calculated by:
+
+rpm = (22500 * 60) / (count * divider)
+
+Automatic fan clock divider
+
+  * User sets 0 to fan_min limit
+    - low speed alarm is disabled
+    - fan clock divider not changed
+    - auto fan clock adjuster enabled for valid fan speed reading
+
+  * User sets fan_min limit too low
+    - low speed alarm is enabled
+    - fan clock divider set to max
+    - fan_min set to register value 254 which corresponds
+      to 664 rpm on adm9240
+    - low speed alarm will be asserted if fan speed is
+      less than minimum measurable speed
+    - auto fan clock adjuster disabled
+
+  * User sets reasonable fan speed
+    - low speed alarm is enabled
+    - fan clock divider set to suit fan_min
+    - auto fan clock adjuster enabled: adjusts fan_min
+
+  * User sets unreasonably high low fan speed limit
+    - resolution of the low speed limit may be reduced
+    - alarm will be asserted
+    - auto fan clock adjuster enabled: adjusts fan_min
+
+    * fan speed may be displayed as zero until the auto fan clock divider
+      adjuster brings fan speed clock divider back into chip measurement
+      range, this will occur within a few measurement cycles.
+
+Analog Output
+-------------
+An analog output provides a 0 to 1.25 volt signal intended for an external
+fan speed amplifier circuit. The analog output is set to maximum value on
+power up or reset. This doesn't do much on the test Intel SE440BX-2.
+
+Voltage Monitor
+
+Voltage (IN) measurement is internally scaled:
+
+    nr  label       nominal     maximum   resolution
+                      mV          mV         mV
+    0   +2.5V        2500        3320       13.0
+    1   Vccp1        2700        3600       14.1
+    2   +3.3V        3300        4380       17.2
+    3     +5V        5000        6640       26.0
+    4    +12V       12000       15940       62.5
+    5   Vccp2        2700        3600       14.1
+
+The reading is an unsigned 8-bit value, nominal voltage measurement is
+represented by a reading of 192, being 3/4 of the measurement range.
+
+An alarm is asserted for any voltage going below or above the set limits.
+
+The driver reports and accepts voltage limits scaled to the above table.
+
+VID Monitor
+-----------
+The chip has five inputs to read the 5-bit VID and reports the mV value
+based on detected CPU type.
+
+Chassis Intrusion
+-----------------
+An alarm is asserted when the CI pin goes active high. The ADM9240
+Datasheet has an example of an external temperature sensor driving
+this pin. On an Intel SE440BX-2 the Chassis Intrusion header is
+connected to a normally open switch.
+
+The ADM9240 provides an internal open drain on this line, and may output
+a 20 ms active low pulse to reset an external Chassis Intrusion latch.
+
+Clear the CI latch by writing value 1 to the sysfs chassis_clear file.
+
+Alarm flags reported as 16-bit word
+
+    bit     label               comment
+    ---     -------------       --------------------------
+     0      +2.5 V_Error        high or low limit exceeded
+     1      VCCP_Error          high or low limit exceeded
+     2      +3.3 V_Error        high or low limit exceeded
+     3      +5 V_Error          high or low limit exceeded
+     4      Temp_Error          temperature error
+     6      FAN1_Error          fan low limit exceeded
+     7      FAN2_Error          fan low limit exceeded
+     8      +12 V_Error         high or low limit exceeded
+     9      VCCP2_Error         high or low limit exceeded
+    12      Chassis_Error       CI pin went high
+
+Remaining bits are reserved and thus undefined. It is important to note
+that alarm bits may be cleared on read, user-space may latch alarms and
+provide the end-user with a method to clear alarm memory.

Documentation/hwmon/asb100

@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+Kernel driver asb100
+====================
+
+Supported Chips:
+  * Asus ASB100 and ASB100-A "Bach"
+    Prefix: 'asb100'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2d
+    Datasheet: none released
+
+Author: Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the Asus ASB100 and ASB100-A "Bach".
+These are custom ASICs available only on Asus mainboards. Asus refuses to
+supply a datasheet for these chips. Thanks go to many people who helped
+investigate their hardware, including:
+
+Vitaly V. Bursov
+Alexander van Kaam (author of MBM for Windows)
+Bertrik Sikken
+
+The ASB100 implements seven voltage sensors, three fan rotation speed
+sensors, four temperature sensors, VID lines and alarms. In addition to
+these, the ASB100-A also implements a single PWM controller for fans 2 and
+3 (i.e. one setting controls both.) If you have a plain ASB100, the PWM
+controller will simply not work (or maybe it will for you... it doesn't for
+me).
+
+Temperatures are measured and reported in degrees Celsius.
+
+Fan speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report values in volts.
+
+The VID lines encode the core voltage value: the voltage level your
+processor should work with. This is hardcoded by the mainboard and/or
+processor itself. It is a value in volts.
+
+Alarms: (TODO question marks indicate may or may not work)
+
+0x0001 => in0 (?)
+0x0002 => in1 (?)
+0x0004 => in2
+0x0008 => in3
+0x0010 => temp1 (1)
+0x0020 => temp2
+0x0040 => fan1
+0x0080 => fan2
+0x0100 => in4
+0x0200 => in5 (?) (2)
+0x0400 => in6 (?) (2)
+0x0800 => fan3
+0x1000 => chassis switch
+0x2000 => temp3
+
+Alarm Notes:
+
+(1) This alarm will only trigger if the hysteresis value is 127C.
+I.e. it behaves the same as w83781d.
+
+(2) The min and max registers for these values appear to
+be read-only or otherwise stuck at 0x00.
+
+TODO:
+* Experiment with fan divisors > 8.
+* Experiment with temp. sensor types.
+* Are there really 13 voltage inputs? Probably not...
+* Cleanups, no doubt...
+

Documentation/hwmon/ds1621

@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+Kernel driver ds1621
+====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Dallas Semiconductor DS1621
+    Prefix: 'ds1621'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website
+               http://www.dalsemi.com/
+  * Dallas Semiconductor DS1625
+    Prefix: 'ds1621'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website
+               http://www.dalsemi.com/
+
+Authors:
+        Christian W. Zuckschwerdt <zany@triq.net>
+        valuable contributions by Jan M. Sendler <sendler@sendler.de>
+        ported to 2.6 by Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net>
+        with the help of Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+Module Parameters
+------------------
+
+* polarity int
+  Output's polarity: 0 = active high, 1 = active low
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The DS1621 is a (one instance) digital thermometer and thermostat. It has
+both high and low temperature limits which can be user defined (i.e.
+programmed into non-volatile on-chip registers). Temperature range is -55
+degree Celsius to +125 in 0.5 increments. You may convert this into a
+Fahrenheit range of -67 to +257 degrees with 0.9 steps. If polarity
+parameter is not provided, original value is used.
+
+As for the thermostat, behavior can also be programmed using the polarity
+toggle. On the one hand ("heater"), the thermostat output of the chip,
+Tout, will trigger when the low limit temperature is met or underrun and
+stays high until the high limit is met or exceeded. On the other hand
+("cooler"), vice versa. That way "heater" equals "active low", whereas
+"conditioner" equals "active high". Please note that the DS1621 data sheet
+is somewhat misleading in this point since setting the polarity bit does
+not simply invert Tout.
+
+A second thing is that, during extensive testing, Tout showed a tolerance
+of up to +/- 0.5 degrees even when compared against precise temperature
+readings. Be sure to have a high vs. low temperature limit gap of al least
+1.0 degree Celsius to avoid Tout "bouncing", though!
+
+As for alarms, you can read the alarm status of the DS1621 via the 'alarms'
+/sys file interface. The result consists mainly of bit 6 and 5 of the
+configuration register of the chip; bit 6 (0x40 or 64) is the high alarm
+bit and bit 5 (0x20 or 32) the low one. These bits are set when the high or
+low limits are met or exceeded and are reset by the module as soon as the
+respective temperature ranges are left.
+
+The alarm registers are in no way suitable to find out about the actual
+status of Tout. They will only tell you about its history, whether or not
+any of the limits have ever been met or exceeded since last power-up or
+reset. Be aware: When testing, it showed that the status of Tout can change
+with neither of the alarms set.
+
+Temperature conversion of the DS1621 takes up to 1000ms; internal access to
+non-volatile registers may last for 10ms or below.
+
+High Accuracy Temperature Reading
+---------------------------------
+
+As said before, the temperature issued via the 9-bit i2c-bus data is
+somewhat arbitrary. Internally, the temperature conversion is of a
+different kind that is explained (not so...) well in the DS1621 data sheet.
+To cut the long story short: Inside the DS1621 there are two oscillators,
+both of them biassed by a temperature coefficient.
+
+Higher resolution of the temperature reading can be achieved using the
+internal projection, which means taking account of REG_COUNT and REG_SLOPE
+(the driver manages them):
+
+Taken from Dallas Semiconductors App Note 068: 'Increasing Temperature
+Resolution on the DS1620' and App Note 105: 'High Resolution Temperature
+Measurement with Dallas Direct-to-Digital Temperature Sensors'
+
+- Read the 9-bit temperature and strip the LSB (Truncate the .5 degs)
+- The resulting value is TEMP_READ.
+- Then, read REG_COUNT.
+- And then, REG_SLOPE.
+
+      TEMP = TEMP_READ - 0.25 + ((REG_SLOPE - REG_COUNT) / REG_SLOPE)
+
+Note that this is what the DONE bit in the DS1621 configuration register is
+good for: Internally, one temperature conversion takes up to 1000ms. Before
+that conversion is complete you will not be able to read valid things out
+of REG_COUNT and REG_SLOPE. The DONE bit, as you may have guessed by now,
+tells you whether the conversion is complete ("done", in plain English) and
+thus, whether the values you read are good or not.
+
+The DS1621 has two modes of operation: "Continuous" conversion, which can
+be understood as the default stand-alone mode where the chip gets the
+temperature and controls external devices via its Tout pin or tells other
+i2c's about it if they care. The other mode is called "1SHOT", that means
+that it only figures out about the temperature when it is explicitly told
+to do so; this can be seen as power saving mode.
+
+Now if you want to read REG_COUNT and REG_SLOPE, you have to either stop
+the continuous conversions until the contents of these registers are valid,
+or, in 1SHOT mode, you have to have one conversion made.

Documentation/hwmon/fscher

@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+Kernel driver fscher
+====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Fujitsu-Siemens Hermes chip
+    Prefix: 'fscher'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x73
+
+Authors:
+        Reinhard Nissl <rnissl@gmx.de> based on work
+        from Hermann Jung <hej@odn.de>,
+        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the Fujitsu-Siemens Hermes chip. It is
+described in the 'Register Set Specification BMC Hermes based Systemboard'
+from Fujitsu-Siemens.
+
+The Hermes chip implements a hardware-based system management, e.g. for
+controlling fan speed and core voltage. There is also a watchdog counter on
+the chip which can trigger an alarm and even shut the system down.
+
+The chip provides three temperature values (CPU, motherboard and
+auxiliary), three voltage values (+12V, +5V and battery) and three fans
+(power supply, CPU and auxiliary).
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. The resolution is 1 degree.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). The value
+can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2 or 4) which is stored on
+the chip.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as "in" sensors) report their values in volts.
+
+All values are reported as final values from the driver. There is no need
+for further calculations.
+
+
+Detailed description
+--------------------
+
+Below you'll find a single line description of all the bit values. With
+this information, you're able to decode e. g. alarms, wdog, etc. To make
+use of the watchdog, you'll need to set the watchdog time and enable the
+watchdog. After that it is necessary to restart the watchdog time within
+the specified period of time, or a system reset will occur.
+
+* revision
+  READING & 0xff = 0x??: HERMES revision identification
+
+* alarms
+  READING & 0x80 = 0x80: CPU throttling active
+  READING & 0x80 = 0x00: CPU running at full speed
+
+  READING & 0x10 = 0x10: software event (see control:1)
+  READING & 0x10 = 0x00: no software event
+
+  READING & 0x08 = 0x08: watchdog event (see wdog:2)
+  READING & 0x08 = 0x00: no watchdog event
+
+  READING & 0x02 = 0x02: thermal event (see temp*:1)
+  READING & 0x02 = 0x00: no thermal event
+
+  READING & 0x01 = 0x01: fan event (see fan*:1)
+  READING & 0x01 = 0x00: no fan event
+
+  READING & 0x13 ! 0x00: ALERT LED is flashing
+
+* control
+  READING & 0x01 = 0x01: software event
+  READING & 0x01 = 0x00: no software event
+
+  WRITING & 0x01 = 0x01: set software event
+  WRITING & 0x01 = 0x00: clear software event
+
+* watchdog_control
+  READING & 0x80 = 0x80: power off on watchdog event while thermal event
+  READING & 0x80 = 0x00: watchdog power off disabled (just system reset enabled)
+
+  READING & 0x40 = 0x40: watchdog timebase 60 seconds (see also wdog:1)
+  READING & 0x40 = 0x00: watchdog timebase  2 seconds
+
+  READING & 0x10 = 0x10: watchdog enabled
+  READING & 0x10 = 0x00: watchdog disabled
+
+  WRITING & 0x80 = 0x80: enable "power off on watchdog event while thermal event"
+  WRITING & 0x80 = 0x00: disable "power off on watchdog event while thermal event"
+
+  WRITING & 0x40 = 0x40: set watchdog timebase to 60 seconds
+  WRITING & 0x40 = 0x00: set watchdog timebase to  2 seconds
+
+  WRITING & 0x20 = 0x20: disable watchdog
+
+  WRITING & 0x10 = 0x10: enable watchdog / restart watchdog time
+
+* watchdog_state
+  READING & 0x02 = 0x02: watchdog system reset occurred
+  READING & 0x02 = 0x00: no watchdog system reset occurred
+
+  WRITING & 0x02 = 0x02: clear watchdog event
+
+* watchdog_preset
+  READING & 0xff = 0x??: configured watch dog time in units (see wdog:3 0x40)
+
+  WRITING & 0xff = 0x??: configure watch dog time in units
+
+* in*     (0: +5V, 1: +12V, 2: onboard 3V battery)
+  READING: actual voltage value
+
+* temp*_status   (1: CPU sensor, 2: onboard sensor, 3: auxiliary sensor)
+  READING & 0x02 = 0x02: thermal event (overtemperature)
+  READING & 0x02 = 0x00: no thermal event
+
+  READING & 0x01 = 0x01: sensor is working
+  READING & 0x01 = 0x00: sensor is faulty
+
+  WRITING & 0x02 = 0x02: clear thermal event
+
+* temp*_input   (1: CPU sensor, 2: onboard sensor, 3: auxiliary sensor)
+  READING: actual temperature value
+
+* fan*_status   (1: power supply fan, 2: CPU fan, 3: auxiliary fan)
+  READING & 0x04 = 0x04: fan event (fan fault)
+  READING & 0x04 = 0x00: no fan event
+
+  WRITING & 0x04 = 0x04: clear fan event
+
+* fan*_div (1: power supply fan, 2: CPU fan, 3: auxiliary fan)
+  	Divisors 2,4 and 8 are supported, both for reading and writing
+
+* fan*_pwm   (1: power supply fan, 2: CPU fan, 3: auxiliary fan)
+  READING & 0xff = 0x00: fan may be switched off
+  READING & 0xff = 0x01: fan must run at least at minimum speed (supply: 6V)
+  READING & 0xff = 0xff: fan must run at maximum speed (supply: 12V)
+  READING & 0xff = 0x??: fan must run at least at given speed (supply: 6V..12V)
+
+  WRITING & 0xff = 0x00: fan may be switched off
+  WRITING & 0xff = 0x01: fan must run at least at minimum speed (supply: 6V)
+  WRITING & 0xff = 0xff: fan must run at maximum speed (supply: 12V)
+  WRITING & 0xff = 0x??: fan must run at least at given speed (supply: 6V..12V)
+
+* fan*_input   (1: power supply fan, 2: CPU fan, 3: auxiliary fan)
+  READING: actual RPM value
+
+
+Limitations
+-----------
+
+* Measuring fan speed
+It seems that the chip counts "ripples" (typical fans produce 2 ripples per
+rotation while VERAX fans produce 18) in a 9-bit register. This register is
+read out every second, then the ripple prescaler (2, 4 or 8) is applied and
+the result is stored in the 8 bit output register. Due to the limitation of
+the counting register to 9 bits, it is impossible to measure a VERAX fan
+properly (even with a prescaler of 8). At its maximum speed of 3500 RPM the
+fan produces 1080 ripples per second which causes the counting register to
+overflow twice, leading to only 186 RPM.
+
+* Measuring input voltages
+in2 ("battery") reports the voltage of the onboard lithium battery and not
++3.3V from the power supply.
+
+* Undocumented features
+Fujitsu-Siemens Computers has not documented all features of the chip so
+far. Their software, System Guard, shows that there are a still some
+features which cannot be controlled by this implementation.

Documentation/hwmon/gl518sm

@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+Kernel driver gl518sm
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Genesys Logic GL518SM release 0x00
+    Prefix: 'gl518sm'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c and 0x2d
+    Datasheet: http://www.genesyslogic.com/pdf
+  * Genesys Logic GL518SM release 0x80
+    Prefix: 'gl518sm'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c and 0x2d
+    Datasheet: http://www.genesyslogic.com/pdf
+
+Authors:
+        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+        Ky<4B>sti M<>lkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>
+        Hong-Gunn Chew <hglinux@gunnet.org>
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+IMPORTANT:
+
+For the revision 0x00 chip, the in0, in1, and in2  values (+5V, +3V,
+and +12V) CANNOT be read. This is a limitation of the chip, not the driver.
+
+This driver supports the Genesys Logic GL518SM chip. There are at least
+two revision of this chip, which we call revision 0x00 and 0x80. Revision
+0x80 chips support the reading of all voltages and revision 0x00 only
+for VIN3.
+
+The GL518SM implements one temperature sensor, two fan rotation speed
+sensors, and four voltage sensors. It can report alarms through the
+computer speakers.
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. An alarm goes off while the
+temperature is above the over temperature limit, and has not yet dropped
+below the hysteresis limit. The alarm always reflects the current
+situation. Measurements are guaranteed between -10 degrees and +110
+degrees, with a accuracy of +/-3 degrees.
+
+Rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. In
+case when you have selected to turn fan1 off, no fan1 alarm is triggered.
+
+Fan readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to
+give the readings more range or accuracy.  Not all RPM values can
+accurately be represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider
+of 2, the lowest representable value is around 1900 RPM.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as VIN sensors) report their values in volts.
+An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum or
+maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to
+zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. The VDD input
+measures voltages between 0.000 and 5.865 volt, with a resolution of 0.023
+volt. The other inputs measure voltages between 0.000 and 4.845 volt, with
+a resolution of 0.019 volt. Note that revision 0x00 chips do not support
+reading the current voltage of any input except for VIN3; limit setting and
+alarms work fine, though.
+
+When an alarm is triggered, you can be warned by a beeping signal through your
+computer speaker. It is possible to enable all beeping globally, or only the
+beeping for some alarms.
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once (except for temperature alarms). This means that the
+cause for the alarm may already have disappeared! Note that in the current
+implementation, all hardware registers are read whenever any data is read
+(unless it is less than 1.5 seconds since the last update). This means that
+you can easily miss once-only alarms.
+
+The GL518SM only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often
+will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.

Documentation/hwmon/it87

@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+Kernel driver it87
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * IT8705F
+    Prefix: 'it87'
+    Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space, or default ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
+               http://www.ite.com.tw/
+  * IT8712F
+    Prefix: 'it8712'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f
+                       from Super I/O config space, or default ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
+               http://www.ite.com.tw/
+  * SiS950   [clone of IT8705F]
+    Prefix: 'sis950'
+    Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space, or default ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: No longer be available
+
+Author: Christophe Gauthron <chrisg@0-in.com>
+
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+
+* update_vbat: int
+
+  0 if vbat should report power on value, 1 if vbat should be updated after
+  each read. Default is 0. On some boards the battery voltage is provided
+  by either the battery or the onboard power supply. Only the first reading
+  at power on will be the actual battery voltage (which the chip does
+  automatically). On other boards the battery voltage is always fed to
+  the chip so can be read at any time. Excessive reading may decrease
+  battery life but no information is given in the datasheet.
+
+* fix_pwm_polarity int
+
+  Force PWM polarity to active high (DANGEROUS). Some chips are
+  misconfigured by BIOS - PWM values would be inverted. This option tries
+  to fix this. Please contact your BIOS manufacturer and ask him for fix.
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the IT8705F, IT8712F and SiS950 chips.
+
+This driver also supports IT8712F, which adds SMBus access, and a VID
+input, used to report the Vcore voltage of the Pentium processor.
+The IT8712F additionally features VID inputs.
+
+These chips are 'Super I/O chips', supporting floppy disks, infrared ports,
+joysticks and other miscellaneous stuff. For hardware monitoring, they
+include an 'environment controller' with 3 temperature sensors, 3 fan
+rotation speed sensors, 8 voltage sensors, and associated alarms.
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. An alarm is triggered once
+when the Overtemperature Shutdown limit is crossed.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
+readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give the
+readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be
+represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest
+representable value is around 2600 RPM.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts. An
+alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum or
+maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to
+zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage
+inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution of
+0.016 volt. The battery voltage in8 does not have limit registers.
+
+The VID lines (IT8712F only) encode the core voltage value: the voltage
+level your processor should work with. This is hardcoded by the mainboard
+and/or processor itself. It is a value in volts.
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may already
+have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all hardware
+registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less than 1.5
+seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily miss
+once-only alarms.
+
+The IT87xx only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often
+will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.
+
+To change sensor N to a thermistor, 'echo 2 > tempN_type' where N is 1, 2,
+or 3. To change sensor N to a thermal diode, 'echo 3 > tempN_type'.
+Give 0 for unused sensor. Any other value is invalid. To configure this at
+startup, consult lm_sensors's /etc/sensors.conf. (2 = thermistor;
+3 = thermal diode)
+
+The fan speed control features are limited to manual PWM mode. Automatic
+"Smart Guardian" mode control handling is not implemented. However
+if you want to go for "manual mode" just write 1 to pwmN_enable.

Documentation/hwmon/lm63

@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+Kernel driver lm63
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor LM63
+    Prefix: 'lm63'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM63.html
+
+Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+Thanks go to Tyan and especially Alex Buckingham for setting up a remote
+access to their S4882 test platform for this driver.
+  http://www.tyan.com/
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The LM63 is a digital temperature sensor with integrated fan monitoring
+and control.
+
+The LM63 is basically an LM86 with fan speed monitoring and control
+capabilities added. It misses some of the LM86 features though:
+ - No low limit for local temperature.
+ - No critical limit for local temperature.
+ - Critical limit for remote temperature can be changed only once. We
+   will consider that the critical limit is read-only.
+
+The datasheet isn't very clear about what the tachometer reading is.
+
+An explanation from National Semiconductor: The two lower bits of the read
+value have to be masked out. The value is still 16 bit in width.
+
+All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution is 1.0
+degree for the local temperature, 0.125 degree for the remote temperature.
+
+The fan speed is measured using a tachometer. Contrary to most chips which
+store the value in an 8-bit register and have a selectable clock divider
+to make sure that the result will fit in the register, the LM63 uses 16-bit
+value for measuring the speed of the fan. It can measure fan speeds down to
+83 RPM, at least in theory.
+
+Note that the pin used for fan monitoring is shared with an alert out
+function. Depending on how the board designer wanted to use the chip, fan
+speed monitoring will or will not be possible. The proper chip configuration
+is left to the BIOS, and the driver will blindly trust it.
+
+A PWM output can be used to control the speed of the fan. The LM63 has two
+PWM modes: manual and automatic. Automatic mode is not fully implemented yet
+(you cannot define your custom PWM/temperature curve), and mode change isn't
+supported either.
+
+The lm63 driver will not update its values more frequently than every
+second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return 'old'
+values.
+

Documentation/hwmon/lm75

@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+Kernel driver lm75
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor LM75
+    Prefix: 'lm75'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/
+  * Dallas Semiconductor DS75
+    Prefix: 'lm75'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website
+               http://www.maxim-ic.com/
+  * Dallas Semiconductor DS1775
+    Prefix: 'lm75'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Dallas Semiconductor website
+               http://www.maxim-ic.com/
+  * Maxim MAX6625, MAX6626
+    Prefix: 'lm75'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
+               http://www.maxim-ic.com/
+  * Microchip (TelCom) TCN75
+    Prefix: 'lm75'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Microchip website
+               http://www.microchip.com/
+
+Author: Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The LM75 implements one temperature sensor. Limits can be set through the
+Overtemperature Shutdown register and Hysteresis register. Each value can be
+set and read to half-degree accuracy.
+An alarm is issued (usually to a connected LM78) when the temperature
+gets higher then the Overtemperature Shutdown value; it stays on until
+the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value.
+All temperatures are in degrees Celsius, and are guaranteed within a
+range of -55 to +125 degrees.
+
+The LM75 only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often
+will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.
+
+The LM75 is usually used in combination with LM78-like chips, to measure
+the temperature of the processor(s).
+
+The DS75, DS1775, MAX6625, and MAX6626 are supported as well.
+They are not distinguished from an LM75. While most of these chips
+have three additional bits of accuracy (12 vs. 9 for the LM75),
+the additional bits are not supported. Not only that, but these chips will
+not be detected if not in 9-bit precision mode (use the force parameter if
+needed).
+
+The TCN75 is supported as well, and is not distinguished from an LM75.
+
+The LM75 is essentially an industry standard; there may be other
+LM75 clones not listed here, with or without various enhancements,
+that are supported.
+
+The LM77 is not supported, contrary to what we pretended for a long time.
+Both chips are simply not compatible, value encoding differs.

Documentation/hwmon/lm77

@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+Kernel driver lm77
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor LM77
+    Prefix: 'lm77'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/
+
+Author: Andras BALI <drewie@freemail.hu>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The LM77 implements one temperature sensor. The temperature
+sensor incorporates a band-gap type temperature sensor,
+10-bit ADC, and a digital comparator with user-programmable upper
+and lower limit values.
+
+Limits can be set through the Overtemperature Shutdown register and
+Hysteresis register.

Documentation/hwmon/lm78

@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+Kernel driver lm78
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor LM78
+    Prefix: 'lm78'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/
+  * National Semiconductor LM78-J
+    Prefix: 'lm78-j'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/
+  * National Semiconductor LM79
+    Prefix: 'lm79'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/
+
+Author: Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM78, LM78-J
+and LM79. They are described as 'Microprocessor System Hardware Monitors'.
+
+There is almost no difference between the three supported chips. Functionally,
+the LM78 and LM78-J are exactly identical. The LM79 has one more VID line,
+which is used to report the lower voltages newer Pentium processors use.
+From here on, LM7* means either of these three types.
+
+The LM7* implements one temperature sensor, three fan rotation speed sensors,
+seven voltage sensors, VID lines, alarms, and some miscellaneous stuff.
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. An alarm is triggered once
+when the Overtemperature Shutdown limit is crossed; it is triggered again
+as soon as it drops below the Hysteresis value. A more useful behavior
+can be found by setting the Hysteresis value to +127 degrees Celsius; in
+this case, alarms are issued during all the time when the actual temperature
+is above the Overtemperature Shutdown value. Measurements are guaranteed
+between -55 and +125 degrees, with a resolution of 1 degree.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
+readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give
+the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be
+represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest
+representable value is around 2600 RPM.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts.
+An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
+or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to
+zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage
+inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution
+of 0.016 volt.
+
+The VID lines encode the core voltage value: the voltage level your processor
+should work with. This is hardcoded by the mainboard and/or processor itself.
+It is a value in volts. When it is unconnected, you will often find the
+value 3.50 V here.
+
+In addition to the alarms described above, there are a couple of additional
+ones. There is a BTI alarm, which gets triggered when an external chip has
+crossed its limits. Usually, this is connected to all LM75 chips; if at
+least one crosses its limits, this bit gets set. The CHAS alarm triggers
+if your computer case is open. The FIFO alarms should never trigger; it
+indicates an internal error. The SMI_IN alarm indicates some other chip
+has triggered an SMI interrupt. As we do not use SMI interrupts at all,
+this condition usually indicates there is a problem with some other
+device.
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may
+already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all
+hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less
+than 1.5 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily
+miss once-only alarms.
+
+The LM7* only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often
+will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.

Documentation/hwmon/lm80

@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+Kernel driver lm80
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor LM80
+    Prefix: 'lm80'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/
+
+Authors:
+        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM80.
+It is described as a 'Serial Interface ACPI-Compatible Microprocessor
+System Hardware Monitor'.
+
+The LM80 implements one temperature sensor, two fan rotation speed sensors,
+seven voltage sensors, alarms, and some miscellaneous stuff.
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. There are two sets of limits
+which operate independently. When the HOT Temperature Limit is crossed,
+this will cause an alarm that will be reasserted until the temperature
+drops below the HOT Hysteresis. The Overtemperature Shutdown (OS) limits
+should work in the same way (but this must be checked; the datasheet
+is unclear about this). Measurements are guaranteed between -55 and
++125 degrees. The current temperature measurement has a resolution of
+0.0625 degrees; the limits have a resolution of 1 degree.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
+readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give
+the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be
+represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest
+representable value is around 2600 RPM.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts.
+An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
+or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to
+zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage
+inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 2.55 volts, with a resolution
+of 0.01 volt.
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may
+already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all
+hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less
+than 2.0 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily
+miss once-only alarms.
+
+The LM80 only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often
+will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.

Documentation/hwmon/lm83

@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+Kernel driver lm83
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor LM83
+    Prefix: 'lm83'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM83.html
+
+
+Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The LM83 is a digital temperature sensor. It senses its own temperature as
+well as the temperature of up to three external diodes. It is compatible
+with many other devices such as the LM84 and all other ADM1021 clones.
+The main difference between the LM83 and the LM84 in that the later can
+only sense the temperature of one external diode.
+
+Using the adm1021 driver for a LM83 should work, but only two temperatures
+will be reported instead of four.
+
+The LM83 is only found on a handful of motherboards. Both a confirmed
+list and an unconfirmed list follow. If you can confirm or infirm the
+fact that any of these motherboards do actually have an LM83, please
+contact us. Note that the LM90 can easily be misdetected as a LM83.
+
+Confirmed motherboards:
+    SBS         P014
+
+Unconfirmed motherboards:
+    Gigabyte    GA-8IK1100
+    Iwill       MPX2
+    Soltek      SL-75DRV5
+
+The driver has been successfully tested by Magnus Forsstr<74>m, who I'd
+like to thank here. More testers will be of course welcome.
+
+The fact that the LM83 is only scarcely used can be easily explained.
+Most motherboards come with more than just temperature sensors for
+health monitoring. They also have voltage and fan rotation speed
+sensors. This means that temperature-only chips are usually used as
+secondary chips coupled with another chip such as an IT8705F or similar
+chip, which provides more features. Since systems usually need three
+temperature sensors (motherboard, processor, power supply) and primary
+chips provide some temperature sensors, the secondary chip, if needed,
+won't have to handle more than two temperatures. Thus, ADM1021 clones
+are sufficient, and there is no need for a four temperatures sensor
+chip such as the LM83. The only case where using an LM83 would make
+sense is on SMP systems, such as the above-mentioned Iwill MPX2,
+because you want an additional temperature sensor for each additional
+CPU.
+
+On the SBS P014, this is different, since the LM83 is the only hardware
+monitoring chipset. One temperature sensor is used for the motherboard
+(actually measuring the LM83's own temperature), one is used for the
+CPU. The two other sensors must be used to measure the temperature of
+two other points of the motherboard. We suspect these points to be the
+north and south bridges, but this couldn't be confirmed.
+
+All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Local temperature
+is given within a range of 0 to +85 degrees. Remote temperatures are
+given within a range of 0 to +125 degrees. Resolution is 1.0 degree,
+accuracy is guaranteed to 3.0 degrees (see the datasheet for more
+details).
+
+Each sensor has its own high limit, but the critical limit is common to
+all four sensors. There is no hysteresis mechanism as found on most
+recent temperature sensors.
+
+The lm83 driver will not update its values more frequently than every
+other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return
+'old' values.

Documentation/hwmon/lm85

@@ -0,0 +1,221 @@
+Kernel driver lm85
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor LM85 (B and C versions)
+    Prefix: 'lm85'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+    Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM85.html
+  * Analog Devices ADM1027
+    Prefix: 'adm1027'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+    Datasheet: http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,,766_825_ADM1027,00.html
+  * Analog Devices ADT7463
+    Prefix: 'adt7463'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+    Datasheet: http://www.analog.com/en/prod/0,,766_825_ADT7463,00.html
+  * SMSC EMC6D100, SMSC EMC6D101
+    Prefix: 'emc6d100'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+    Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/tools/discontinued/6d100.pdf
+  * SMSC EMC6D102
+    Prefix: 'emc6d102'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+    Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d102.html
+
+Authors:
+        Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com>,
+        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+        Richard Barrington <rich_b_nz@clear.net.nz>,
+        Margit Schubert-While <margitsw@t-online.de>,
+        Justin Thiessen <jthiessen@penguincomputing.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM85 and
+compatible chips including the Analog Devices ADM1027, ADT7463 and
+SMSC EMC6D10x chips family.
+
+The LM85 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBUS 2.0
+specification. Using an analog to digital converter it measures three (3)
+temperatures and five (5) voltages. It has four (4) 16-bit counters for
+measuring fan speed. Five (5) digital inputs are provided for sampling the
+VID signals from the processor to the VRM. Lastly, there are three (3) PWM
+outputs that can be used to control fan speed.
+
+The voltage inputs have internal scaling resistors so that the following
+voltage can be measured without external resistors:
+
+  2.5V, 3.3V, 5V, 12V, and CPU core voltage (2.25V)
+
+The temperatures measured are one internal diode, and two remote diodes.
+Remote 1 is generally the CPU temperature. These inputs are designed to
+measure a thermal diode like the one in a Pentium 4 processor in a socket
+423 or socket 478 package. They can also measure temperature using a
+transistor like the 2N3904.
+
+A sophisticated control system for the PWM outputs is designed into the
+LM85 that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the
+three temperature sensors. Each PWM output is individually adjustable and
+programmable. Once configured, the LM85 will adjust the PWM outputs in
+response to the measured temperatures without further host intervention.
+This feature can also be disabled for manual control of the PWM's.
+
+Each of the measured inputs (voltage, temperature, fan speed) has
+corresponding high/low limit values. The LM85 will signal an ALARM if any
+measured value exceeds either limit.
+
+The LM85 samples all inputs continuously. The lm85 driver will not read
+the registers more often than once a second. Further, configuration data is
+only read once each 5 minutes. There is twice as much config data as
+measurements, so this would seem to be a worthwhile optimization.
+
+Special Features
+----------------
+
+The LM85 has four fan speed monitoring modes. The ADM1027 has only two.
+Both have special circuitry to compensate for PWM interactions with the
+TACH signal from the fans. The ADM1027 can be configured to measure the
+speed of a two wire fan, but the input conditioning circuitry is different
+for 3-wire and 2-wire mode. For this reason, the 2-wire fan modes are not
+exposed to user control. The BIOS should initialize them to the correct
+mode. If you've designed your own ADM1027, you'll have to modify the
+init_client function and add an insmod parameter to set this up.
+
+To smooth the response of fans to changes in temperature, the LM85 has an
+optional filter for smoothing temperatures. The ADM1027 has the same
+config option but uses it to rate limit the changes to fan speed instead.
+
+The ADM1027 and ADT7463 have a 10-bit ADC and can therefore measure
+temperatures with 0.25 degC resolution. They also provide an offset to the
+temperature readings that is automatically applied during measurement.
+This offset can be used to zero out any errors due to traces and placement.
+The documentation says that the offset is in 0.25 degC steps, but in
+initial testing of the ADM1027 it was 1.00 degC steps. Analog Devices has
+confirmed this "bug". The ADT7463 is reported to work as described in the
+documentation. The current lm85 driver does not show the offset register.
+
+The ADT7463 has a THERM asserted counter. This counter has a 22.76ms
+resolution and a range of 5.8 seconds. The driver implements a 32-bit
+accumulator of the counter value to extend the range to over a year. The
+counter will stay at it's max value until read.
+
+See the vendor datasheets for more information. There is application note
+from National (AN-1260) with some additional information about the LM85.
+The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for
+determining an optimal configuration for the automatic PWM control.
+
+The SMSC EMC6D100 & EMC6D101 monitor external voltages, temperatures, and
+fan speeds. They use this monitoring capability to alert the system to out
+of limit conditions and can automatically control the speeds of multiple
+fans in a PC or embedded system. The EMC6D101, available in a 24-pin SSOP
+package, and the EMC6D100, available in a 28-pin SSOP package, are designed
+to be register compatible. The EMC6D100 offers all the features of the
+EMC6D101 plus additional voltage monitoring and system control features.
+Unfortunately it is not possible to distinguish between the package
+versions on register level so these additional voltage inputs may read
+zero. The EMC6D102 features addtional ADC bits thus extending precision
+of voltage and temperature channels.
+
+
+Hardware Configurations
+-----------------------
+
+The LM85 can be jumpered for 3 different SMBus addresses. There are
+no other hardware configuration options for the LM85.
+
+The lm85 driver detects both LM85B and LM85C revisions of the chip. See the
+datasheet for a complete description of the differences. Other than
+identifying the chip, the driver behaves no differently with regard to
+these two chips. The LM85B is recommended for new designs.
+
+The ADM1027 and ADT7463 chips have an optional SMBALERT output that can be
+used to signal the chipset in case a limit is exceeded or the temperature
+sensors fail. Individual sensor interrupts can be masked so they won't
+trigger SMBALERT. The SMBALERT output if configured replaces one of the other
+functions (PWM2 or IN0). This functionality is not implemented in current
+driver.
+
+The ADT7463 also has an optional THERM output/input which can be connected
+to the processor PROC_HOT output. If available, the autofan control
+dynamic Tmin feature can be enabled to keep the system temperature within
+spec (just?!) with the least possible fan noise.
+
+Configuration Notes
+-------------------
+
+Besides standard interfaces driver adds following:
+
+* Temperatures and Zones
+
+Each temperature sensor is associated with a Zone. There are three
+sensors and therefore three zones (# 1, 2 and 3). Each zone has the following
+temperature configuration points:
+
+* temp#_auto_temp_off - temperature below which fans should be off or spinning very low.
+* temp#_auto_temp_min - temperature over which fans start to spin.
+* temp#_auto_temp_max - temperature when fans spin at full speed.
+* temp#_auto_temp_crit - temperature when all fans will run full speed.
+
+* PWM Control
+
+There are three PWM outputs. The LM85 datasheet suggests that the
+pwm3 output control both fan3 and fan4. Each PWM can be individually
+configured and assigned to a zone for it's control value. Each PWM can be
+configured individually according to the following options.
+
+* pwm#_auto_pwm_min - this specifies the PWM value for temp#_auto_temp_off
+                      temperature. (PWM value from 0 to 255)
+
+* pwm#_auto_pwm_freq - select base frequency of PWM output. You can select
+                       in range of 10.0 to 94.0 Hz in .1 Hz units.
+		       (Values 100 to 940).
+
+The pwm#_auto_pwm_freq can be set to one of the following 8 values. Setting the
+frequency to a value not on this list, will result in the next higher frequency
+being selected. The actual device frequency may vary slightly from this
+specification as designed by the manufacturer. Consult the datasheet for more
+details. (PWM Frequency values:  100, 150, 230, 300, 380, 470, 620, 940)
+
+* pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl - this flags selects for temp#_auto_temp_off temperature
+                         the bahaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at
+			 pwm#_auto_pwm_min or write 0 to let them off.
+
+NOTE: It has been reported that there is a bug in the LM85 that causes the flag
+to be associated with the zones not the PWMs. This contradicts all the
+published documentation. Setting pwm#_min_ctl in this case actually affects all
+PWMs controlled by zone '#'.
+
+* PWM Controlling Zone selection
+
+* pwm#_auto_channels - controls zone that is associated with PWM
+
+Configuration choices:
+
+   Value     Meaning
+  ------  ------------------------------------------------
+      1    Controlled by Zone 1
+      2    Controlled by Zone 2
+      3    Controlled by Zone 3
+     23    Controlled by higher temp of Zone 2 or 3
+    123    Controlled by highest temp of Zone 1, 2 or 3
+      0    PWM always 0%  (off)
+     -1    PWM always 100%  (full on)
+     -2    Manual control (write to 'pwm#' to set)
+
+The National LM85's have two vendor specific configuration
+features. Tach. mode and Spinup Control. For more details on these,
+see the LM85 datasheet or Application Note AN-1260.
+
+The Analog Devices ADM1027 has several vendor specific enhancements.
+The number of pulses-per-rev of the fans can be set, Tach monitoring
+can be optimized for PWM operation, and an offset can be applied to
+the temperatures to compensate for systemic errors in the
+measurements.
+
+In addition to the ADM1027 features, the ADT7463 also has Tmin control
+and THERM asserted counts. Automatic Tmin control acts to adjust the
+Tmin value to maintain the measured temperature sensor at a specified
+temperature. There isn't much documentation on this feature in the
+ADT7463 data sheet. This is not supported by current driver.

Documentation/hwmon/lm87

@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+Kernel driver lm87
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor LM87
+    Prefix: 'lm87'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
+    Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM87.html
+
+Authors:
+        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+        Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
+        Stephen Rousset <stephen.rousset@rocketlogix.com>,
+        Dan Eaton <dan.eaton@rocketlogix.com>,
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>,
+        Original 2.6 port Jeff Oliver
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM87.
+
+The LM87 implements up to three temperature sensors, up to two fan
+rotation speed sensors, up to seven voltage sensors, alarms, and some
+miscellaneous stuff.
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. Each input has a high
+and low alarm settings. A high limit produces an alarm when the value
+goes above it, and an alarm is also produced when the value goes below
+the low limit.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
+readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give
+the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be
+represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest
+representable value is around 2600 RPM.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in
+volts. An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable
+minimum or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means
+'closest to zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements.
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may
+already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all
+hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less
+than 1.0 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily
+miss once-only alarms.
+
+The lm87 driver only updates its values each 1.0 seconds; reading it more
+often will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.
+
+
+Hardware Configurations
+-----------------------
+
+The LM87 has four pins which can serve one of two possible functions,
+depending on the hardware configuration.
+
+Some functions share pins, so not all functions are available at the same
+time. Which are depends on the hardware setup. This driver assumes that
+the BIOS configured the chip correctly. In that respect, it differs from
+the original driver (from lm_sensors for Linux 2.4), which would force the
+LM87 to an arbitrary, compile-time chosen mode, regardless of the actual
+chipset wiring.
+
+For reference, here is the list of exclusive functions:
+ - in0+in5 (default) or temp3
+ - fan1 (default) or in6
+ - fan2 (default) or in7
+ - VID lines (default) or IRQ lines (not handled by this driver)

Documentation/hwmon/lm90

@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+Kernel driver lm90
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor LM90
+    Prefix: 'lm90'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM90.html
+  * National Semiconductor LM89
+    Prefix: 'lm99'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM89.html
+  * National Semiconductor LM99
+    Prefix: 'lm99'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM99.html
+  * National Semiconductor LM86
+    Prefix: 'lm86'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+               http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM86.html
+  * Analog Devices ADM1032
+    Prefix: 'adm1032'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+               http://products.analog.com/products/info.asp?product=ADM1032
+  * Analog Devices ADT7461
+    Prefix: 'adt7461'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+               http://products.analog.com/products/info.asp?product=ADT7461
+    Note: Only if in ADM1032 compatibility mode
+  * Maxim MAX6657
+    Prefix: 'max6657'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
+               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578
+  * Maxim MAX6658
+    Prefix: 'max6657'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
+               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578
+  * Maxim MAX6659
+    Prefix: 'max6657'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d (unsupported 0x4e)
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
+               http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578
+
+
+Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The LM90 is a digital temperature sensor. It senses its own temperature as
+well as the temperature of up to one external diode. It is compatible
+with many other devices such as the LM86, the LM89, the LM99, the ADM1032,
+the MAX6657, MAX6658 and the MAX6659 all of which are supported by this driver.
+Note that there is no easy way to differentiate between the last three
+variants. The extra address and features of the MAX6659 are not supported by
+this driver. Additionally, the ADT7461 is supported if found in ADM1032
+compatibility mode.
+
+The specificity of this family of chipsets over the ADM1021/LM84
+family is that it features critical limits with hysteresis, and an
+increased resolution of the remote temperature measurement.
+
+The different chipsets of the family are not strictly identical, although
+very similar. This driver doesn't handle any specific feature for now,
+but could if there ever was a need for it. For reference, here comes a
+non-exhaustive list of specific features:
+
+LM90:
+  * Filter and alert configuration register at 0xBF.
+  * ALERT is triggered by temperatures over critical limits.
+
+LM86 and LM89:
+  * Same as LM90
+  * Better external channel accuracy
+
+LM99:
+  * Same as LM89
+  * External temperature shifted by 16 degrees down
+
+ADM1032:
+  * Consecutive alert register at 0x22.
+  * Conversion averaging.
+  * Up to 64 conversions/s.
+  * ALERT is triggered by open remote sensor.
+
+ADT7461
+  * Extended temperature range (breaks compatibility)
+  * Lower resolution for remote temperature
+
+MAX6657 and MAX6658:
+  * Remote sensor type selection
+
+MAX6659
+  * Selectable address
+  * Second critical temperature limit
+  * Remote sensor type selection
+
+All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution
+is 1.0 degree for the local temperature, 0.125 degree for the remote
+temperature.
+
+Each sensor has its own high and low limits, plus a critical limit.
+Additionally, there is a relative hysteresis value common to both critical
+values. To make life easier to user-space applications, two absolute values
+are exported, one for each channel, but these values are of course linked.
+Only the local hysteresis can be set from user-space, and the same delta
+applies to the remote hysteresis.
+
+The lm90 driver will not update its values more frequently than every
+other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return
+'old' values.
+

Documentation/hwmon/lm92

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+Kernel driver lm92
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor LM92
+    Prefix: 'lm92'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b
+    Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM92.html
+  * National Semiconductor LM76
+    Prefix: 'lm92'
+    Addresses scanned: none, force parameter needed
+    Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM76.html
+  * Maxim MAX6633/MAX6634/MAX6635
+    Prefix: 'lm92'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4b
+    MAX6633 with address in 0x40 - 0x47, 0x4c - 0x4f needs force parameter
+    and MAX6634 with address in 0x4c - 0x4f needs force parameter
+    Datasheet: http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3074
+
+Authors:
+        Abraham van der Merwe <abraham@2d3d.co.za>
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM92
+temperature sensor.
+
+Each LM92 temperature sensor supports a single temperature sensor. There are
+alarms for high, low, and critical thresholds. There's also an hysteresis to
+control the thresholds for resetting alarms.
+
+Support was added later for the LM76 and Maxim MAX6633/MAX6634/MAX6635,
+which are mostly compatible. They have not all been tested, so you
+may need to use the force parameter.

Documentation/hwmon/max1619

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+Kernel driver max1619
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Maxim MAX1619
+    Prefix: 'max1619'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18-0x1a, 0x29-0x2b, 0x4c-0x4e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
+               http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX1619.pdf
+
+Authors:
+        Alexey Fisher <fishor@mail.ru>,
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The MAX1619 is a digital temperature sensor. It senses its own temperature as
+well as the temperature of up to one external diode.
+
+All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution
+is 1.0 degree for the local temperature and for the remote temperature.
+
+Only the external sensor has high and low limits.
+
+The max1619 driver will not update its values more frequently than every
+other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return
+'old' values.
+

Documentation/hwmon/pc87360

@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+Kernel driver pc87360
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * National Semiconductor PC87360, PC87363, PC87364, PC87365 and PC87366
+    Prefixes: 'pc87360', 'pc87363', 'pc87364', 'pc87365', 'pc87366'
+    Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+    Datasheets:
+        http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87360.html
+        http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87363.html
+        http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87364.html
+        http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87365.html
+        http://www.national.com/pf/PC/PC87366.html
+
+Authors: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+Thanks to Sandeep Mehta, Tonko de Rooy and Daniel Ceregatti for testing.
+Thanks to Rudolf Marek for helping me investigate conversion issues.
+
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+
+* init int
+  Chip initialization level:
+   0: None
+  *1: Forcibly enable internal voltage and temperature channels, except in9
+   2: Forcibly enable all voltage and temperature channels, except in9
+   3: Forcibly enable all voltage and temperature channels, including in9
+
+Note that this parameter has no effect for the PC87360, PC87363 and PC87364
+chips.
+
+Also note that for the PC87366, initialization levels 2 and 3 don't enable
+all temperature channels, because some of them share pins with each other,
+so they can't be used at the same time.
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The National Semiconductor PC87360 Super I/O chip contains monitoring and
+PWM control circuitry for two fans. The PC87363 chip is similar, and the
+PC87364 chip has monitoring and PWM control for a third fan.
+
+The National Semiconductor PC87365 and PC87366 Super I/O chips are complete
+hardware monitoring chipsets, not only controlling and monitoring three fans,
+but also monitoring eleven voltage inputs and two (PC87365) or up to four
+(PC87366) temperatures.
+
+  Chip        #vin    #fan    #pwm    #temp   devid
+
+  PC87360     -       2       2       -       0xE1
+  PC87363     -       2       2       -       0xE8
+  PC87364     -       3       3       -       0xE4
+  PC87365     11      3       3       2       0xE5
+  PC87366     11      3       3       3-4     0xE9
+
+The driver assumes that no more than one chip is present, and one of the
+standard Super I/O addresses is used (0x2E/0x2F or 0x4E/0x4F)
+
+Fan Monitoring
+--------------
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (revolutions per minute). An alarm
+is triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit.
+A different alarm is triggered if the fan speed is too low to be measured.
+
+Fan readings are affected by a programmable clock divider, giving the
+readings more range or accuracy. Usually, users have to learn how it works,
+but this driver implements dynamic clock divider selection, so you don't
+have to care no more.
+
+For reference, here are a few values about clock dividers:
+
+                slowest         accuracy        highest
+                measurable      around 3000     accurate
+    divider     speed (RPM)     RPM (RPM)       speed (RPM)
+         1        1882              18           6928
+         2         941              37           4898
+         4         470              74           3464
+         8         235             150           2449
+
+For the curious, here is how the values above were computed:
+ * slowest measurable speed: clock/(255*divider)
+ * accuracy around 3000 RPM: 3000^2/clock
+ * highest accurate speed: sqrt(clock*100)
+The clock speed for the PC87360 family is 480 kHz. I arbitrarily chose 100
+RPM as the lowest acceptable accuracy.
+
+As mentioned above, you don't have to care about this no more.
+
+Note that not all RPM values can be represented, even when the best clock
+divider is selected. This is not only true for the measured speeds, but
+also for the programmable low limits, so don't be surprised if you try to
+set, say, fan1_min to 2900 and it finally reads 2909.
+
+
+Fan Control
+-----------
+
+PWM (pulse width modulation) values range from 0 to 255, with 0 meaning
+that the fan is stopped, and 255 meaning that the fan goes at full speed.
+
+Be extremely careful when changing PWM values. Low PWM values, even
+non-zero, can stop the fan, which may cause irreversible damage to your
+hardware if temperature increases too much. When changing PWM values, go
+step by step and keep an eye on temperatures.
+
+One user reported problems with PWM. Changing PWM values would break fan
+speed readings. No explanation nor fix could be found.
+
+
+Temperature Monitoring
+----------------------
+
+Temperatures are reported in degrees Celsius. Each temperature measured has
+associated low, high and overtemperature limits, each of which triggers an
+alarm when crossed.
+
+The first two temperature channels are external. The third one (PC87366
+only) is internal.
+
+The PC87366 has three additional temperature channels, based on
+thermistors (as opposed to thermal diodes for the first three temperature
+channels). For technical reasons, these channels are held by the VLM
+(voltage level monitor) logical device, not the TMS (temperature
+measurement) one. As a consequence, these temperatures are exported as
+voltages, and converted into temperatures in user-space.
+
+Note that these three additional channels share their pins with the
+external thermal diode channels, so you (physically) can't use them all at
+the same time. Although it should be possible to mix the two sensor types,
+the documents from National Semiconductor suggest that motherboard
+manufacturers should choose one type and stick to it. So you will more
+likely have either channels 1 to 3 (thermal diodes) or 3 to 6 (internal
+thermal diode, and thermistors).
+
+
+Voltage Monitoring
+------------------
+
+Voltages are reported relatively to a reference voltage, either internal or
+external. Some of them (in7:Vsb, in8:Vdd and in10:AVdd) are divided by two
+internally, you will have to compensate in sensors.conf. Others (in0 to in6)
+are likely to be divided externally. The meaning of each of these inputs as
+well as the values of the resistors used for division is left to the
+motherboard manufacturers, so you will have to document yourself and edit
+sensors.conf accordingly. National Semiconductor has a document with
+recommended resistor values for some voltages, but this still leaves much
+room for per motherboard specificities, unfortunately. Even worse,
+motherboard manufacturers don't seem to care about National Semiconductor's
+recommendations.
+
+Each voltage measured has associated low and high limits, each of which
+triggers an alarm when crossed.
+
+When available, VID inputs are used to provide the nominal CPU Core voltage.
+The driver will default to VRM 9.0, but this can be changed from user-space.
+The chipsets can handle two sets of VID inputs (on dual-CPU systems), but
+the driver will only export one for now. This may change later if there is
+a need.
+
+
+General Remarks
+---------------
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may already
+have disappeared! Note that all hardware registers are read whenever any
+data is read (unless it is less than 2 seconds since the last update, in
+which case cached values are returned instead). As a consequence, when
+a once-only alarm triggers, it may take 2 seconds for it to show, and 2
+more seconds for it to disappear.
+
+Monitoring of in9 isn't enabled at lower init levels (<3) because that
+channel measures the battery voltage (Vbat). It is a known fact that
+repeatedly sampling the battery voltage reduces its lifetime. National
+Semiconductor smartly designed their chipset so that in9 is sampled only
+once every 1024 sampling cycles (that is every 34 minutes at the default
+sampling rate), so the effect is attenuated, but still present.
+
+
+Limitations
+-----------
+
+The datasheets suggests that some values (fan mins, fan dividers)
+shouldn't be changed once the monitoring has started, but we ignore that
+recommendation. We'll reconsider if it actually causes trouble.

Documentation/hwmon/sis5595

@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+Kernel driver sis5595
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Silicon Integrated Systems Corp. SiS5595 Southbridge Hardware Monitor
+    Prefix: 'sis5595'
+    Addresses scanned: ISA in PCI-space encoded address
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Silicon Integrated Systems Corp. site.
+
+Authors:
+        Ky<4B>sti M<>lkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>,
+        Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
+        Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net> 2.6 port
+
+   SiS southbridge has a LM78-like chip integrated on the same IC.
+   This driver is a customized copy of lm78.c
+
+   Supports following revisions:
+       Version         PCI ID          PCI Revision
+       1               1039/0008       AF or less
+       2               1039/0008       B0 or greater
+
+   Note: these chips contain a 0008 device which is incompatible with the
+        5595. We recognize these by the presence of the listed
+        "blacklist" PCI ID and refuse to load.
+
+   NOT SUPPORTED       PCI ID          BLACKLIST PCI ID
+        540            0008            0540
+        550            0008            0550
+       5513            0008            5511
+       5581            0008            5597
+       5582            0008            5597
+       5597            0008            5597
+        630            0008            0630
+        645            0008            0645
+        730            0008            0730
+        735            0008            0735
+
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+force_addr=0xaddr	Set the I/O base address. Useful for boards
+			that don't set the address in the BIOS. Does not do a
+			PCI force; the device must still be present in lspci.
+			Don't use this unless the driver complains that the
+			base address is not set.
+			Example: 'modprobe sis5595 force_addr=0x290'
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The SiS5595 southbridge has integrated hardware monitor functions. It also
+has an I2C bus, but this driver only supports the hardware monitor. For the
+I2C bus driver see i2c-sis5595.
+
+The SiS5595 implements zero or one temperature sensor, two fan speed
+sensors, four or five voltage sensors, and alarms.
+
+On the first version of the chip, there are four voltage sensors and one
+temperature sensor.
+
+On the second version of the chip, the temperature sensor (temp) and the
+fifth voltage sensor (in4) share a pin which is configurable, but not
+through the driver. Sorry. The driver senses the configuration of the pin,
+which was hopefully set by the BIOS.
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. An alarm is triggered once
+when the max is crossed; it is also triggered when it drops below the min
+value. Measurements are guaranteed between -55 and +125 degrees, with a
+resolution of 1 degree.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
+readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give
+the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be
+represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest
+representable value is around 2600 RPM.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts. An
+alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum or
+maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to
+zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage
+inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution of
+0.016 volt.
+
+In addition to the alarms described above, there is a BTI alarm, which gets
+triggered when an external chip has crossed its limits. Usually, this is
+connected to some LM75-like chip; if at least one crosses its limits, this
+bit gets set.
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may already
+have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all hardware
+registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less than 1.5
+seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily miss
+once-only alarms.
+
+The SiS5595 only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often
+will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.
+
+Problems
+--------
+Some chips refuse to be enabled. We don't know why.
+The driver will recognize this and print a message in dmesg.
+

Documentation/hwmon/smsc47b397

@@ -1,7 +1,19 @@
+Kernel driver smsc47b397
+========================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * SMSC LPC47B397-NC
+    Prefix: 'smsc47b397'
+    Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+    Datasheet: In this file
+
+Authors: Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>
+         Utilitek Systems, Inc.
+
 November 23, 2004
 
 The following specification describes the SMSC LPC47B397-NC sensor chip
-(for which there is no public datasheet available).  This document was
+(for which there is no public datasheet available). This document was
 provided by Craig Kelly (In-Store Broadcast Network) and edited/corrected
 by Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>.
 
@@ -10,10 +22,10 @@ by Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com>.
 Methods for detecting the HP SIO and reading the thermal data on a dc7100.
 
 The thermal information on the dc7100 is contained in the SIO Hardware Monitor
-(HWM).  The information is accessed through an index/data pair.  The index/data
-pair is located at the HWM Base Address + 0 and the HWM Base Address + 1.  The
+(HWM). The information is accessed through an index/data pair. The index/data
+pair is located at the HWM Base Address + 0 and the HWM Base Address + 1. The
 HWM Base address can be obtained from Logical Device 8, registers 0x60 (MSB)
-and 0x61 (LSB).  Currently we are using 0x480 for the HWM Base Address and
+and 0x61 (LSB). Currently we are using 0x480 for the HWM Base Address and
 0x480 and 0x481 for the index/data pair.
 
 Reading temperature information.
@@ -50,7 +62,7 @@ Reading the tach LSB locks the tach MSB.
 The LSB Must be read first.
 
 How to convert the tach reading to RPM.
-The tach reading (TCount) is given by:  (Tach MSB * 256) + (Tach LSB)
+The tach reading (TCount) is given by: (Tach MSB * 256) + (Tach LSB)
 The SIO counts the number of 90kHz (11.111us) pulses per revolution.
 RPM = 60/(TCount * 11.111us)
 
@@ -72,20 +84,20 @@ To program the configuration registers, the following sequence must be followed:
 
 Enter Configuration Mode
 To place the chip into the Configuration State The config key (0x55) is written
-to the CONFIG PORT (0x2E). 
+to the CONFIG PORT (0x2E).
 
 Configuration Mode
 In configuration mode, the INDEX PORT is located at the CONFIG PORT address and
 the DATA PORT is at INDEX PORT address + 1.
 
-The desired configuration registers are accessed in two steps: 
+The desired configuration registers are accessed in two steps:
 a.	Write the index of the Logical Device Number Configuration Register
 	(i.e., 0x07) to the INDEX PORT and then write the number of the
 	desired logical device to the DATA PORT.
 
 b.	Write the address of the desired configuration register within the
 	logical device to the INDEX PORT and then write or read the config-
-	uration register through the DATA PORT.  
+	uration register through the DATA PORT.
 
 Note: If accessing the Global Configuration Registers, step (a) is not required.
 
@@ -96,18 +108,18 @@ The chip returns to the RUN State.  (This is important).
 Programming Example
 The following is an example of how to read the SIO Device ID located at 0x20
 
-; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE   
+; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE
 MOV	DX,02EH
 MOV	AX,055H
 OUT	DX,AL
-; GLOBAL CONFIGURATION  REGISTER 
+; GLOBAL CONFIGURATION  REGISTER
 MOV	DX,02EH
 MOV	AL,20H
-OUT	DX,AL 
+OUT	DX,AL
 ; READ THE DATA
 MOV	DX,02FH
 IN	AL,DX
-; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE     
+; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE
 MOV	DX,02EH
 MOV	AX,0AAH
 OUT	DX,AL
@@ -122,12 +134,12 @@ Obtaining the HWM Base Address.
 The following is an example of how to read the HWM Base Address located in
 Logical Device 8.
 
-; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE   
+; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE
 MOV	DX,02EH
 MOV	AX,055H
 OUT	DX,AL
-; CONFIGURE REGISTER CRE0,   
-; LOGICAL DEVICE 8           
+; CONFIGURE REGISTER CRE0,
+; LOGICAL DEVICE 8
 MOV	DX,02EH
 MOV	AL,07H
 OUT	DX,AL ;Point to LD# Config Reg
@@ -135,12 +147,12 @@ MOV	DX,02FH
 MOV	AL, 08H
 OUT	DX,AL;Point to Logical Device 8
 ;
-MOV	DX,02EH 
+MOV	DX,02EH
 MOV	AL,60H
 OUT	DX,AL	; Point to HWM Base Addr MSB
 MOV	DX,02FH
 IN	AL,DX	; Get MSB of HWM Base Addr
-; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE     
+; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE
 MOV	DX,02EH
 MOV	AX,0AAH
 OUT	DX,AL

Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m1

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+Kernel driver smsc47m1
+======================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * SMSC LPC47B27x, LPC47M10x, LPC47M13x, LPC47M14x, LPC47M15x and LPC47M192
+    Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+    Prefix: 'smsc47m1'
+    Datasheets:
+        http://www.smsc.com/main/datasheets/47b27x.pdf
+        http://www.smsc.com/main/datasheets/47m10x.pdf
+        http://www.smsc.com/main/tools/discontinued/47m13x.pdf
+        http://www.smsc.com/main/datasheets/47m14x.pdf
+        http://www.smsc.com/main/tools/discontinued/47m15x.pdf
+        http://www.smsc.com/main/datasheets/47m192.pdf
+
+Authors:
+        Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
+        With assistance from Bruce Allen <ballen@uwm.edu>, and his
+        fan.c program: http://www.lsc-group.phys.uwm.edu/%7Eballen/driver/
+        Gabriele Gorla <gorlik@yahoo.com>,
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The Standard Microsystems Corporation (SMSC) 47M1xx Super I/O chips
+contain monitoring and PWM control circuitry for two fans.
+
+The 47M15x and 47M192 chips contain a full 'hardware monitoring block'
+in addition to the fan monitoring and control. The hardware monitoring
+block is not supported by the driver.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
+readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give
+the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be
+represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest
+representable value is around 2600 RPM.
+
+PWM values are from 0 to 255.
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may
+already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all
+hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less
+than 1.5 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily
+miss once-only alarms.
+
+
+**********************
+The lm_sensors project gratefully acknowledges the support of
+Intel in the development of this driver.

Documentation/hwmon/userspace-tools

@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+Introduction
+------------
+
+Most mainboards have sensor chips to monitor system health (like temperatures,
+voltages, fans speed). They are often connected through an I2C bus, but some
+are also connected directly through the ISA bus.
+
+The kernel drivers make the data from the sensor chips available in the /sys
+virtual filesystem. Userspace tools are then used to display or set or the
+data in a more friendly manner.
+
+Lm-sensors
+----------
+
+Core set of utilites that will allow you to obtain health information,
+setup monitoring limits etc. You can get them on their homepage
+http://www.lm-sensors.nu/ or as a package from your Linux distribution.
+
+If from website:
+Get lmsensors from project web site. Please note, you need only userspace
+part, so compile with "make user_install" target.
+
+General hints to get things working:
+
+0) get lm-sensors userspace utils
+1) compile all drivers in I2C section as modules in your kernel
+2) run sensors-detect script, it will tell you what modules you need to load.
+3) load them and run "sensors" command, you should see some results.
+4) fix sensors.conf, labels, limits, fan divisors
+5) if any more problems consult FAQ, or documentation
+
+Other utilites
+--------------
+
+If you want some graphical indicators of system health look for applications
+like: gkrellm, ksensors, xsensors, wmtemp, wmsensors, wmgtemp, ksysguardd,
+hardware-monitor
+
+If you are server administrator you can try snmpd or mrtgutils.

Documentation/hwmon/via686a

@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+Kernel driver via686a
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Via VT82C686A, VT82C686B  Southbridge Integrated Hardware Monitor
+    Prefix: 'via686a'
+    Addresses scanned: ISA in PCI-space encoded address
+    Datasheet: On request through web form (http://www.via.com.tw/en/support/datasheets/)
+
+Authors:
+        Ky<4B>sti M<>lkki <kmalkki@cc.hut.fi>,
+        Mark D. Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
+        Bob Dougherty <bobd@stanford.edu>
+        (Some conversion-factor data were contributed by
+        Jonathan Teh Soon Yew <j.teh@iname.com>
+        and Alex van Kaam <darkside@chello.nl>.)
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+
+force_addr=0xaddr       Set the I/O base address. Useful for Asus A7V boards
+                        that don't set the address in the BIOS. Does not do a
+                        PCI force; the via686a must still be present in lspci.
+                        Don't use this unless the driver complains that the
+                        base address is not set.
+                        Example: 'modprobe via686a force_addr=0x6000'
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The driver does not distinguish between the chips and reports
+all as a 686A.
+
+The Via 686a southbridge has integrated hardware monitor functionality.
+It also has an I2C bus, but this driver only supports the hardware monitor.
+For the I2C bus driver, see <file:Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-viapro>
+
+The Via 686a implements three temperature sensors, two fan rotation speed
+sensors, five voltage sensors and alarms.
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. An alarm is triggered once
+when the Overtemperature Shutdown limit is crossed; it is triggered again
+as soon as it drops below the hysteresis value.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
+readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8) to give
+the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately be
+represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest
+representable value is around 2600 RPM.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts.
+An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
+or maximum limit. Voltages are internally scalled, so each voltage channel
+has a different resolution and range.
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may
+already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all
+hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less
+than 1.5 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily
+miss once-only alarms.
+
+The driver only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often
+will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.

Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf

@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+Kernel driver w83627hf
+======================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Winbond W83627HF (ISA accesses ONLY)
+    Prefix: 'w83627hf'
+    Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+    Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/w83627hf.pdf
+  * Winbond W83627THF
+    Prefix: 'w83627thf'
+    Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+    Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/w83627thf.pdf
+  * Winbond W83697HF
+    Prefix: 'w83697hf'
+    Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+    Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/697hf.pdf
+  * Winbond W83637HF
+    Prefix: 'w83637hf'
+    Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
+    Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/w83637hf.pdf
+
+Authors:
+        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+        Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>,
+        Bernhard C. Schrenk <clemy@clemy.org>
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+
+* force_addr: int
+  Initialize the ISA address of the sensors
+* force_i2c: int
+  Initialize the I2C address of the sensors
+* init: int
+  (default is 1)
+  Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip.
+  Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module.
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for ISA accesses *only* for
+the Winbond W83627HF, W83627THF, W83697HF and W83637HF Super I/O chips.
+We will refer to them collectively as Winbond chips.
+
+This driver supports ISA accesses, which should be more reliable
+than i2c accesses. Also, for Tyan boards which contain both a
+Super I/O chip and a second i2c-only Winbond chip (often a W83782D),
+using this driver will avoid i2c address conflicts and complex
+initialization that were required in the w83781d driver.
+
+If you really want i2c accesses for these Super I/O chips,
+use the w83781d driver. However this is not the preferred method
+now that this ISA driver has been developed.
+
+Technically, the w83627thf does not support a VID reading. However, it's
+possible or even likely that your mainboard maker has routed these signals
+to a specific set of general purpose IO pins (the Asus P4C800-E is one such
+board). The w83627thf driver now interprets these as VID. If the VID on
+your board doesn't work, first see doc/vid in the lm_sensors package. If
+that still doesn't help, email us at lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org.
+
+For further information on this driver see the w83781d driver
+documentation.
+

Documentation/hwmon/w83781d

@@ -0,0 +1,402 @@
+Kernel driver w83781d
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Winbond W83781D
+    Prefix: 'w83781d'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/w83781d.pdf
+  * Winbond W83782D
+    Prefix: 'w83782d'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/w83782d.pdf
+  * Winbond W83783S
+    Prefix: 'w83783s'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2d
+    Datasheet: http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/w83783s.pdf
+  * Winbond W83627HF
+    Prefix: 'w83627hf'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x2f, ISA 0x290 (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: http://www.winbond.com/PDF/sheet/w83627hf.pdf
+  * Asus AS99127F
+    Prefix: 'as99127f'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28 - 0x2f
+    Datasheet: Unavailable from Asus
+
+Authors:
+        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+        Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
+
+Module parameters
+-----------------
+
+* init int
+  (default 1)
+  Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip.
+  Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module.
+
+force_subclients=bus,caddr,saddr,saddr
+  This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of
+  a certain chip. Typical usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2d,0x4a,0x4b'
+  to force the subclients of chip 0x2d on bus 0 to i2c addresses
+  0x4a and 0x4b. This parameter is useful for certain Tyan boards.
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the Winbond W83781D, W83782D, W83783S,
+W83627HF chips, and the Asus AS99127F chips. We will refer to them
+collectively as W8378* chips.
+
+There is quite some difference between these chips, but they are similar
+enough that it was sensible to put them together in one driver.
+The W83627HF chip is assumed to be identical to the ISA W83782D.
+The Asus chips are similar to an I2C-only W83782D.
+
+Chip        #vin    #fanin  #pwm    #temp   wchipid vendid  i2c     ISA
+as99127f    7       3       0       3       0x31    0x12c3  yes     no
+as99127f rev.2 (type_name = as99127f)       0x31    0x5ca3  yes     no
+w83781d     7       3       0       3       0x10-1  0x5ca3  yes     yes
+w83627hf    9       3       2       3       0x21    0x5ca3  yes     yes(LPC)
+w83782d     9       3       2-4     3       0x30    0x5ca3  yes     yes
+w83783s     5-6     3       2       1-2     0x40    0x5ca3  yes     no
+
+Detection of these chips can sometimes be foiled because they can be in
+an internal state that allows no clean access. If you know the address
+of the chip, use a 'force' parameter; this will put them into a more
+well-behaved state first.
+
+The W8378* implements temperature sensors (three on the W83781D and W83782D,
+two on the W83783S), three fan rotation speed sensors, voltage sensors
+(seven on the W83781D, nine on the W83782D and six on the W83783S), VID
+lines, alarms with beep warnings, and some miscellaneous stuff.
+
+Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius. There is always one main
+temperature sensor, and one (W83783S) or two (W83781D and W83782D) other
+sensors. An alarm is triggered for the main sensor once when the
+Overtemperature Shutdown limit is crossed; it is triggered again as soon as
+it drops below the Hysteresis value. A more useful behavior
+can be found by setting the Hysteresis value to +127 degrees Celsius; in
+this case, alarms are issued during all the time when the actual temperature
+is above the Overtemperature Shutdown value. The driver sets the
+hysteresis value for temp1 to 127 at initialization.
+
+For the other temperature sensor(s), an alarm is triggered when the
+temperature gets higher then the Overtemperature Shutdown value; it stays
+on until the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value. But on the
+W83781D, there is only one alarm that functions for both other sensors!
+Temperatures are guaranteed within a range of -55 to +125 degrees. The
+main temperature sensors has a resolution of 1 degree; the other sensor(s)
+of 0.5 degree.
+
+Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
+triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
+readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4 or 8 for the
+W83781D; 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128 for the others) to give
+the readings more range or accuracy. Not all RPM values can accurately
+be represented, so some rounding is done. With a divider of 2, the lowest
+representable value is around 2600 RPM.
+
+Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in volts.
+An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
+or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to
+zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage
+inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution
+of 0.016 volt.
+
+The VID lines encode the core voltage value: the voltage level your processor
+should work with. This is hardcoded by the mainboard and/or processor itself.
+It is a value in volts. When it is unconnected, you will often find the
+value 3.50 V here.
+
+The W83782D and W83783S temperature conversion machine understands about
+several kinds of temperature probes. You can program the so-called
+beta value in the sensor files. '1' is the PII/Celeron diode, '2' is the
+TN3904 transistor, and 3435 the default thermistor value. Other values
+are (not yet) supported.
+
+In addition to the alarms described above, there is a CHAS alarm on the
+chips which triggers if your computer case is open.
+
+When an alarm goes off, you can be warned by a beeping signal through
+your computer speaker. It is possible to enable all beeping globally,
+or only the beeping for some alarms.
+
+If an alarm triggers, it will remain triggered until the hardware register
+is read at least once. This means that the cause for the alarm may
+already have disappeared! Note that in the current implementation, all
+hardware registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less
+than 1.5 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily
+miss once-only alarms.
+
+The chips only update values each 1.5 seconds; reading them more often
+will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.
+
+AS99127F PROBLEMS
+-----------------
+The as99127f support was developed without the benefit of a datasheet.
+In most cases it is treated as a w83781d (although revision 2 of the
+AS99127F looks more like a w83782d).
+This support will be BETA until a datasheet is released.
+One user has reported problems with fans stopping
+occasionally.
+
+Note that the individual beep bits are inverted from the other chips.
+The driver now takes care of this so that user-space applications
+don't have to know about it.
+
+Known problems:
+	- Problems with diode/thermistor settings (supported?)
+	- One user reports fans stopping under high server load.
+	- Revision 2 seems to have 2 PWM registers but we don't know
+	  how to handle them. More details below.
+
+These will not be fixed unless we get a datasheet.
+If you have problems, please lobby Asus to release a datasheet.
+Unfortunately several others have without success.
+Please do not send mail to us asking for better as99127f support.
+We have done the best we can without a datasheet.
+Please do not send mail to the author or the sensors group asking for
+a datasheet or ideas on how to convince Asus. We can't help.
+
+
+NOTES:
+-----
+  783s has no in1 so that in[2-6] are compatible with the 781d/782d.
+
+  783s pin is programmable for -5V or temp1; defaults to -5V,
+       no control in driver so temp1 doesn't work.
+
+  782d and 783s datasheets differ on which is pwm1 and which is pwm2.
+       We chose to follow 782d.
+
+  782d and 783s pin is programmable for fan3 input or pwm2 output;
+       defaults to fan3 input.
+       If pwm2 is enabled (with echo 255 1 > pwm2), then
+       fan3 will report 0.
+
+  782d has pwm1-2 for ISA, pwm1-4 for i2c. (pwm3-4 share pins with
+       the ISA pins)
+
+Data sheet updates:
+------------------
+	- PWM clock registers:
+
+		000: master /  512
+		001: master / 1024
+		010: master / 2048
+		011: master / 4096
+		100: master / 8192
+
+
+Answers from Winbond tech support
+---------------------------------
+>
+> 1) In the W83781D data sheet section 7.2 last paragraph, it talks about
+>    reprogramming the R-T table if the Beta of the thermistor is not
+>    3435K. The R-T table is described briefly in section 8.20.
+>    What formulas do I use to program a new R-T table for a given Beta?
+>
+	We are sorry that the calculation for R-T table value is
+confidential. If you have another Beta value of thermistor, we can help
+to calculate the R-T table for you. But you should give us real R-T
+Table which can be gotten by thermistor vendor. Therefore we will calculate
+them and obtain 32-byte data, and you can fill the 32-byte data to the
+register in Bank0.CR51 of W83781D.
+
+
+> 2) In the W83782D data sheet, it mentions that pins 38, 39, and 40 are
+>    programmable to be either thermistor or Pentium II diode inputs.
+>    How do I program them for diode inputs? I can't find any register
+>    to program these to be diode inputs.
+ --> You may program Bank0 CR[5Dh] and CR[59h] registers.
+
+ 	CR[5Dh]    		bit 1(VTIN1)    bit 2(VTIN2)   bit 3(VTIN3)
+
+      	thermistor                0		 0		0
+ 	diode 		          1		 1		1
+
+
+(error) CR[59h] 		bit 4(VTIN1)	bit 2(VTIN2)   bit 3(VTIN3)
+(right) CR[59h] 		bit 4(VTIN1)	bit 5(VTIN2)   bit 6(VTIN3)
+
+ 	PII thermal diode         1		 1		1
+ 	2N3904	diode	          0		 0		0
+
+
+Asus Clones
+-----------
+
+We have no datasheets for the Asus clones (AS99127F and ASB100 Bach).
+Here are some very useful information that were given to us by Alex Van
+Kaam about how to detect these chips, and how to read their values. He
+also gives advice for another Asus chipset, the Mozart-2 (which we
+don't support yet). Thanks Alex!
+I reworded some parts and added personal comments.
+
+# Detection:
+
+AS99127F rev.1, AS99127F rev.2 and ASB100:
+- I2C address range: 0x29 - 0x2F
+- If register 0x58 holds 0x31 then we have an Asus (either ASB100 or
+  AS99127F)
+- Which one depends on register 0x4F (manufacturer ID):
+  0x06 or 0x94: ASB100
+  0x12 or 0xC3: AS99127F rev.1
+  0x5C or 0xA3: AS99127F rev.2
+  Note that 0x5CA3 is Winbond's ID (WEC), which let us think Asus get their
+  AS99127F rev.2 direct from Winbond. The other codes mean ATT and DVC,
+  respectively. ATT could stand for Asustek something (although it would be
+  very badly chosen IMHO), I don't know what DVC could stand for. Maybe
+  these codes simply aren't meant to be decoded that way.
+
+Mozart-2:
+- I2C address: 0x77
+- If register 0x58 holds 0x56 or 0x10 then we have a Mozart-2
+- Of the Mozart there are 3 types:
+  0x58=0x56, 0x4E=0x94, 0x4F=0x36: Asus ASM58 Mozart-2
+  0x58=0x56, 0x4E=0x94, 0x4F=0x06: Asus AS2K129R Mozart-2
+  0x58=0x10, 0x4E=0x5C, 0x4F=0xA3: Asus ??? Mozart-2
+  You can handle all 3 the exact same way :)
+
+# Temperature sensors:
+
+ASB100:
+- sensor 1: register 0x27
+- sensor 2 & 3 are the 2 LM75's on the SMBus
+- sensor 4: register 0x17
+Remark: I noticed that on Intel boards sensor 2 is used for the CPU
+  and 4 is ignored/stuck, on AMD boards sensor 4 is the CPU and sensor 2 is
+  either ignored or a socket temperature.
+
+AS99127F (rev.1 and 2 alike):
+- sensor 1: register 0x27
+- sensor 2 & 3 are the 2 LM75's on the SMBus
+Remark: Register 0x5b is suspected to be temperature type selector. Bit 1
+  would control temp1, bit 3 temp2 and bit 5 temp3.
+
+Mozart-2:
+- sensor 1: register 0x27
+- sensor 2: register 0x13
+
+# Fan sensors:
+
+ASB100, AS99127F (rev.1 and 2 alike):
+- 3 fans, identical to the W83781D
+
+Mozart-2:
+- 2 fans only, 1350000/RPM/div
+- fan 1: register 0x28,  divisor on register 0xA1 (bits 4-5)
+- fan 2: register 0x29,  divisor on register 0xA1 (bits 6-7)
+
+# Voltages:
+
+This is where there is a difference between AS99127F rev.1 and 2.
+Remark: The difference is similar to the difference between
+  W83781D and W83782D.
+
+ASB100:
+in0=r(0x20)*0.016
+in1=r(0x21)*0.016
+in2=r(0x22)*0.016
+in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
+in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8
+in5=r(0x25)*(-0.016)*3.97
+in6=r(0x26)*(-0.016)*1.666
+
+AS99127F rev.1:
+in0=r(0x20)*0.016
+in1=r(0x21)*0.016
+in2=r(0x22)*0.016
+in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
+in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8
+in5=r(0x25)*(-0.016)*3.97
+in6=r(0x26)*(-0.016)*1.503
+
+AS99127F rev.2:
+in0=r(0x20)*0.016
+in1=r(0x21)*0.016
+in2=r(0x22)*0.016
+in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
+in4=r(0x24)*0.016*3.8
+in5=(r(0x25)*0.016-3.6)*5.14+3.6
+in6=(r(0x26)*0.016-3.6)*3.14+3.6
+
+Mozart-2:
+in0=r(0x20)*0.016
+in1=255
+in2=r(0x22)*0.016
+in3=r(0x23)*0.016*1.68
+in4=r(0x24)*0.016*4
+in5=255
+in6=255
+
+
+# PWM
+
+Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F (may apply to other Asus
+chips as well) by Jean Delvare as of 2004-04-09:
+
+AS99127F revision 2 seems to have two PWM registers at 0x59 and 0x5A,
+and a temperature sensor type selector at 0x5B (which basically means
+that they swapped registers 0x59 and 0x5B when you compare with Winbond
+chips).
+Revision 1 of the chip also has the temperature sensor type selector at
+0x5B, but PWM registers have no effect.
+
+We don't know exactly how the temperature sensor type selection works.
+Looks like bits 1-0 are for temp1, bits 3-2 for temp2 and bits 5-4 for
+temp3, although it is possible that only the most significant bit matters
+each time. So far, values other than 0 always broke the readings.
+
+PWM registers seem to be split in two parts: bit 7 is a mode selector,
+while the other bits seem to define a value or threshold.
+
+When bit 7 is clear, bits 6-0 seem to hold a threshold value. If the value
+is below a given limit, the fan runs at low speed. If the value is above
+the limit, the fan runs at full speed. We have no clue as to what the limit
+represents. Note that there seem to be some inertia in this mode, speed
+changes may need some time to trigger. Also, an hysteresis mechanism is
+suspected since walking through all the values increasingly and then
+decreasingly led to slightly different limits.
+
+When bit 7 is set, bits 3-0 seem to hold a threshold value, while bits 6-4
+would not be significant. If the value is below a given limit, the fan runs
+at full speed, while if it is above the limit it runs at low speed (so this
+is the contrary of the other mode, in a way). Here again, we don't know
+what the limit is supposed to represent.
+
+One remarkable thing is that the fans would only have two or three
+different speeds (transitional states left apart), not a whole range as
+you usually get with PWM.
+
+As a conclusion, you can write 0x00 or 0x8F to the PWM registers to make
+fans run at low speed, and 0x7F or 0x80 to make them run at full speed.
+
+Please contact us if you can figure out how it is supposed to work. As
+long as we don't know more, the w83781d driver doesn't handle PWM on
+AS99127F chips at all.
+
+Additional info about PWM on the AS99127F rev.1 by Hector Martin:
+
+I've been fiddling around with the (in)famous 0x59 register and
+found out the following values do work as a form of coarse pwm:
+
+0x80 - seems to turn fans off after some time(1-2 minutes)... might be
+some form of auto-fan-control based on temp? hmm (Qfan? this mobo is an
+old ASUS, it isn't marketed as Qfan. Maybe some beta pre-attemp at Qfan
+that was dropped at the BIOS)
+0x81 - off
+0x82 - slightly "on-ner" than off, but my fans do not get to move. I can
+hear the high-pitched PWM sound that motors give off at too-low-pwm.
+0x83 - now they do move. Estimate about 70% speed or so.
+0x84-0x8f - full on
+
+Changing the high nibble doesn't seem to do much except the high bit
+(0x80) must be set for PWM to work, else the current pwm doesn't seem to
+change.
+
+My mobo is an ASUS A7V266-E. This behavior is similar to what I got
+with speedfan under Windows, where 0-15% would be off, 15-2x% (can't
+remember the exact value) would be 70% and higher would be full on.

Documentation/hwmon/w83l785ts

@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+Kernel driver w83l785ts
+=======================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Winbond W83L785TS-S
+    Prefix: 'w83l785ts'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2e
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Winbond USA website
+               http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/W83L785TS-S.pdf
+
+Authors:
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The W83L785TS-S is a digital temperature sensor. It senses the
+temperature of a single external diode. The high limit is
+theoretically defined as 85 or 100 degrees C through a combination
+of external resistors, so the user cannot change it. Values seen so
+far suggest that the two possible limits are actually 95 and 110
+degrees C. The datasheet is rather poor and obviously inaccurate
+on several points including this one.
+
+All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution
+is 1.0 degree. See the datasheet for details.
+
+The w83l785ts driver will not update its values more frequently than
+every other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will
+return 'old' values.
+
+Known Issues
+------------
+
+On some systems (Asus), the BIOS is known to interfere with the driver
+and cause read errors. The driver will retry a given number of times
+(5 by default) and then give up, returning the old value (or 0 if
+there is no old value). It seems to work well enough so that you should
+not notice anything. Thanks to James Bolt for helping test this feature.

Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis69x

@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ I suspect that this driver could be made to work for the following SiS
 chipsets as well: 635, and 635T. If anyone owns a board with those chips
 AND is willing to risk crashing & burning an otherwise well-behaved kernel
 in the name of progress... please contact me at <mhoffman@lightlink.com> or
-via the project's mailing list: <sensors@stimpy.netroedge.com>.  Please
+via the project's mailing list: <lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org>.  Please
 send bug reports and/or success stories as well.
 
 

Documentation/i2c/chips/eeprom

@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+Kernel driver eeprom
+====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Any EEPROM chip in the designated address range
+    Prefix: 'eeprom'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x50 - 0x57
+    Datasheets: Publicly available from:
+                Atmel (www.atmel.com),
+                Catalyst (www.catsemi.com),
+                Fairchild (www.fairchildsemi.com),
+                Microchip (www.microchip.com),
+                Philips (www.semiconductor.philips.com),
+                Rohm (www.rohm.com),
+                ST (www.st.com),
+                Xicor (www.xicor.com),
+                and others.
+
+        Chip     Size (bits)    Address
+        24C01     1K            0x50 (shadows at 0x51 - 0x57)
+        24C01A    1K            0x50 - 0x57 (Typical device on DIMMs)
+        24C02     2K            0x50 - 0x57
+        24C04     4K            0x50, 0x52, 0x54, 0x56
+                                (additional data at 0x51, 0x53, 0x55, 0x57)
+        24C08     8K            0x50, 0x54 (additional data at 0x51, 0x52,
+                                0x53, 0x55, 0x56, 0x57)
+        24C16    16K            0x50 (additional data at 0x51 - 0x57)
+        Sony      2K            0x57
+
+        Atmel     34C02B  2K    0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37
+        Catalyst  34FC02  2K    0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37
+        Catalyst  34RC02  2K    0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37
+        Fairchild 34W02   2K    0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37
+        Microchip 24AA52  2K    0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37
+        ST        M34C02  2K    0x50 - 0x57, SW write protect at 0x30-37
+
+
+Authors:
+        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>,
+        Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com>,
+        IBM Corp.
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This is a simple EEPROM module meant to enable reading the first 256 bytes
+of an EEPROM (on a SDRAM DIMM for example). However, it will access serial
+EEPROMs on any I2C adapter. The supported devices are generically called
+24Cxx, and are listed above; however the numbering for these
+industry-standard devices may vary by manufacturer.
+
+This module was a programming exercise to get used to the new project
+organization laid out by Frodo, but it should be at least completely
+effective for decoding the contents of EEPROMs on DIMMs.
+
+DIMMS will typically contain a 24C01A or 24C02, or the 34C02 variants.
+The other devices will not be found on a DIMM because they respond to more
+than one address.
+
+DDC Monitors may contain any device. Often a 24C01, which responds to all 8
+addresses, is found.
+
+Recent Sony Vaio laptops have an EEPROM at 0x57. We couldn't get the
+specification, so it is guess work and far from being complete.
+
+The Microchip 24AA52/24LCS52, ST M34C02, and others support an additional
+software write protect register at 0x30 - 0x37 (0x20 less than the memory
+location). The chip responds to "write quick" detection at this address but
+does not respond to byte reads. If this register is present, the lower 128
+bytes of the memory array are not write protected. Any byte data write to
+this address will write protect the memory array permanently, and the
+device will no longer respond at the 0x30-37 address. The eeprom driver
+does not support this register.
+
+Lacking functionality:
+
+* Full support for larger devices (24C04, 24C08, 24C16). These are not
+typically found on a PC. These devices will appear as separate devices at
+multiple addresses.
+
+* Support for really large devices (24C32, 24C64, 24C128, 24C256, 24C512).
+These devices require two-byte address fields and are not supported.
+
+* Enable Writing. Again, no technical reason why not, but making it easy
+to change the contents of the EEPROMs (on DIMMs anyway) also makes it easy
+to disable the DIMMs (potentially preventing the computer from booting)
+until the values are restored somehow.
+
+Use:
+
+After inserting the module (and any other required SMBus/i2c modules), you
+should have some EEPROM directories in /sys/bus/i2c/devices/* of names such
+as "0-0050". Inside each of these is a series of files, the eeprom file
+contains the binary data from EEPROM.

Documentation/i2c/chips/max6875

@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+Kernel driver max6875
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Maxim MAX6874, MAX6875
+    Prefix: 'max6875'
+    Addresses scanned: 0x50, 0x52
+    Datasheet:
+        http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6874-MAX6875.pdf
+
+Author: Ben Gardner <bgardner@wabtec.com>
+
+
+Module Parameters
+-----------------
+
+* allow_write int
+  Set to non-zero to enable write permission:
+  *0: Read only
+   1: Read and write
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The Maxim MAX6875 is an EEPROM-programmable power-supply sequencer/supervisor.
+It provides timed outputs that can be used as a watchdog, if properly wired.
+It also provides 512 bytes of user EEPROM.
+
+At reset, the MAX6875 reads the configuration EEPROM into its configuration
+registers.  The chip then begins to operate according to the values in the
+registers.
+
+The Maxim MAX6874 is a similar, mostly compatible device, with more intputs
+and outputs:
+
+             vin     gpi    vout
+MAX6874        6       4       8
+MAX6875        4       3       5
+
+MAX6874 chips can have four different addresses (as opposed to only two for
+the MAX6875). The additional addresses (0x54 and 0x56) are not probed by
+this driver by default, but the probe module parameter can be used if
+needed.
+
+See the datasheet for details on how to program the EEPROM.
+
+
+Sysfs entries
+-------------
+
+eeprom_user   - 512 bytes of user-defined EEPROM space. Only writable if
+                allow_write was set and register 0x43 is 0.
+
+eeprom_config - 70 bytes of config EEPROM. Note that changes will not get
+                loaded into register space until a power cycle or device reset.
+
+reg_config    - 70 bytes of register space. Any changes take affect immediately.
+
+
+General Remarks
+---------------
+
+A typical application will require that the EEPROMs be programmed once and
+never altered afterwards.
+

Documentation/i2c/chips/pca9539

@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+Kernel driver pca9539
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Philips PCA9539
+    Prefix: 'pca9539'
+    Addresses scanned: 0x74 - 0x77
+    Datasheet:
+        http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/acrobat/datasheets/PCA9539_2.pdf
+
+Author: Ben Gardner <bgardner@wabtec.com>
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+The Philips PCA9539 is a 16 bit low power I/O device.
+All 16 lines can be individually configured as an input or output.
+The input sense can also be inverted.
+The 16 lines are split between two bytes.
+
+
+Sysfs entries
+-------------
+
+Each is a byte that maps to the 8 I/O bits.
+A '0' suffix is for bits 0-7, while '1' is for bits 8-15.
+
+input[01]     - read the current value
+output[01]    - sets the output value
+direction[01] - direction of each bit: 1=input, 0=output
+invert[01]    - toggle the input bit sense
+
+input reads the actual state of the line and is always available.
+The direction defaults to input for all channels.
+
+
+General Remarks
+---------------
+
+Note that each output, direction, and invert entry controls 8 lines.
+You should use the read, modify, write sequence.
+For example. to set output bit 0 of 1.
+  val=$(cat output0)
+  val=$(( $val | 1 ))
+  echo $val > output0
+

Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8574

@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+Kernel driver pcf8574
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Philips PCF8574
+    Prefix: 'pcf8574'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x20 - 0x27
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips Semiconductors website
+               http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/pip/PCF8574P.html
+
+ * Philips PCF8574A
+    Prefix: 'pcf8574a'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x38 - 0x3f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips Semiconductors website
+               http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/pip/PCF8574P.html
+
+Authors:
+        Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
+        Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
+        Dan Eaton <dan.eaton@rocketlogix.com>,
+        Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net>,
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>,
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+The PCF8574(A) is an 8-bit I/O expander for the I2C bus produced by Philips
+Semiconductors. It is designed to provide a byte I2C interface to up to 16
+separate devices (8 x PCF8574 and 8 x PCF8574A).
+
+This device consists of a quasi-bidirectional port. Each of the eight I/Os
+can be independently used as an input or output. To setup an I/O as an
+input, you have to write a 1 to the corresponding output.
+
+For more informations see the datasheet.
+
+
+Accessing PCF8574(A) via /sys interface
+-------------------------------------
+
+! Be careful !
+The PCF8574(A) is plainly impossible to detect ! Stupid chip.
+So every chip with address in the interval [20..27] and [38..3f] are
+detected as PCF8574(A). If you have other chips in this address
+range, the workaround is to load this module after the one
+for your others chips.
+
+On detection (i.e. insmod, modprobe et al.), directories are being
+created for each detected PCF8574(A):
+
+/sys/bus/i2c/devices/<0>-<1>/
+where <0> is the bus the chip was detected on (e. g. i2c-0)
+and <1> the chip address ([20..27] or [38..3f]):
+
+(example: /sys/bus/i2c/devices/1-0020/)
+
+Inside these directories, there are two files each:
+read and write (and one file with chip name).
+
+The read file is read-only. Reading gives you the current I/O input
+if the corresponding output is set as 1, otherwise the current output
+value, that is to say 0.
+
+The write file is read/write. Writing a value outputs it on the I/O
+port. Reading returns the last written value.
+
+On module initialization the chip is configured as eight inputs (all
+outputs to 1), so you can connect any circuit to the PCF8574(A) without
+being afraid of short-circuit.

Documentation/i2c/chips/pcf8591

@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+Kernel driver pcf8591
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Philips PCF8591
+    Prefix: 'pcf8591'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Philips Semiconductor website
+               http://www.semiconductors.philips.com/pip/PCF8591P.html
+
+Authors:
+        Aurelien Jarno <aurelien@aurel32.net>
+        valuable contributions by Jan M. Sendler <sendler@sendler.de>,
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+
+
+Description
+-----------
+The PCF8591 is an 8-bit A/D and D/A converter (4 analog inputs and one
+analog output) for the I2C bus produced by Philips Semiconductors. It
+is designed to provide a byte I2C interface to up to 4 separate devices.
+
+The PCF8591 has 4 analog inputs programmable as single-ended or
+differential inputs :
+- mode 0 : four single ended inputs
+        Pins AIN0 to AIN3 are single ended inputs for channels 0 to 3
+
+- mode 1 : three differential inputs
+        Pins AIN3 is the common negative differential input
+        Pins AIN0 to AIN2 are positive differential inputs for channels 0 to 2
+
+- mode 2 : single ended and differential mixed
+        Pins AIN0 and AIN1 are single ended inputs for channels 0 and 1
+        Pins AIN2 is the positive differential input for channel 3
+        Pins AIN3 is the negative differential input for channel 3
+
+- mode 3 : two differential inputs
+        Pins AIN0 is the positive differential input for channel 0
+        Pins AIN1 is the negative differential input for channel 0
+        Pins AIN2 is the positive differential input for channel 1
+        Pins AIN3 is the negative differential input for channel 1
+
+See the datasheet for details.
+
+Module parameters
+-----------------
+
+* input_mode int
+
+    Analog input mode:
+         0 = four single ended inputs
+         1 = three differential inputs
+         2 = single ended and differential mixed
+         3 = two differential inputs
+
+
+Accessing PCF8591 via /sys interface
+-------------------------------------
+
+! Be careful !
+The PCF8591 is plainly impossible to detect ! Stupid chip.
+So every chip with address in the interval [48..4f] is
+detected as PCF8591. If you have other chips in this address
+range, the workaround is to load this module after the one
+for your others chips.
+
+On detection (i.e. insmod, modprobe et al.), directories are being
+created for each detected PCF8591:
+
+/sys/bus/devices/<0>-<1>/
+where <0> is the bus the chip was detected on (e. g. i2c-0)
+and <1> the chip address ([48..4f])
+
+Inside these directories, there are such files:
+in0, in1, in2, in3, out0_enable, out0_output, name
+
+Name contains chip name.
+
+The in0, in1, in2 and in3 files are RO. Reading gives the value of the
+corresponding channel. Depending on the current analog inputs configuration,
+files in2 and/or in3 do not exist. Values range are from 0 to 255 for single
+ended inputs and -128 to +127 for differential inputs (8-bit ADC).
+
+The out0_enable file is RW. Reading gives "1" for analog output enabled and
+"0" for analog output disabled. Writing accepts "0" and "1" accordingly.
+
+The out0_output file is RW. Writing a number between 0 and 255 (8-bit DAC), send
+the value to the digital-to-analog converter. Note that a voltage will
+only appears on AOUT pin if aout0_enable equals 1. Reading returns the last
+value written.

Documentation/i2c/dev-interface

@@ -14,9 +14,12 @@ C example
 =========
 
 So let's say you want to access an i2c adapter from a C program. The
-first thing to do is `#include <linux/i2c.h>" and "#include <linux/i2c-dev.h>. 
-Yes, I know, you should never include kernel header files, but until glibc 
-knows about i2c, there is not much choice.
+first thing to do is "#include <linux/i2c-dev.h>". Please note that
+there are two files named "i2c-dev.h" out there, one is distributed
+with the Linux kernel and is meant to be included from kernel
+driver code, the other one is distributed with lm_sensors and is
+meant to be included from user-space programs. You obviously want
+the second one here.
 
 Now, you have to decide which adapter you want to access. You should
 inspect /sys/class/i2c-dev/ to decide this. Adapter numbers are assigned
@@ -78,7 +81,7 @@ Full interface description
 ==========================
 
 The following IOCTLs are defined and fully supported 
-(see also i2c-dev.h and i2c.h):
+(see also i2c-dev.h):
 
 ioctl(file,I2C_SLAVE,long addr)
   Change slave address. The address is passed in the 7 lower bits of the
@@ -97,10 +100,10 @@ ioctl(file,I2C_PEC,long select)
 ioctl(file,I2C_FUNCS,unsigned long *funcs)
   Gets the adapter functionality and puts it in *funcs.
 
-ioctl(file,I2C_RDWR,struct i2c_ioctl_rdwr_data *msgset)
+ioctl(file,I2C_RDWR,struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data *msgset)
 
   Do combined read/write transaction without stop in between.
-  The argument is a pointer to a struct i2c_ioctl_rdwr_data {
+  The argument is a pointer to a struct i2c_rdwr_ioctl_data {
 
       struct i2c_msg *msgs;  /* ptr to array of simple messages */
       int nmsgs;             /* number of messages to exchange */

Documentation/i2c/porting-clients

@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Technical changes:
   Documentation/i2c/sysfs-interface for the individual files. Also
   convert the units these files read and write to the specified ones.
   If you need to add a new type of file, please discuss it on the
-  sensors mailing list <sensors@stimpy.netroedge.com> by providing a
+  sensors mailing list <lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org> by providing a
   patch to the Documentation/i2c/sysfs-interface file.
 
 * [Attach] For I2C drivers, the attach function should make sure

Documentation/i2c/writing-clients

@@ -27,7 +27,6 @@ address.
 static struct i2c_driver foo_driver = {
 	.owner		= THIS_MODULE,
 	.name		= "Foo version 2.3 driver",
-	.id		= I2C_DRIVERID_FOO, /* from i2c-id.h, optional */
 	.flags		= I2C_DF_NOTIFY,
 	.attach_adapter	= &foo_attach_adapter,
 	.detach_client	= &foo_detach_client,
@@ -37,12 +36,6 @@ static struct i2c_driver foo_driver = {
 The name can be chosen freely, and may be upto 40 characters long. Please
 use something descriptive here.
 
-If used, the id should be a unique ID. The range 0xf000 to 0xffff is
-reserved for local use, and you can use one of those until you start
-distributing the driver, at which time you should contact the i2c authors
-to get your own ID(s). Note that most of the time you don't need an ID
-at all so you can just omit it.
-
 Don't worry about the flags field; just put I2C_DF_NOTIFY into it. This
 means that your driver will be notified when new adapters are found.
 This is almost always what you want.
@@ -171,45 +164,31 @@ The following lists are used internally:
 
   normal_i2c: filled in by the module writer. 
      A list of I2C addresses which should normally be examined.
-   normal_i2c_range: filled in by the module writer.
-     A list of pairs of I2C addresses, each pair being an inclusive range of
-     addresses which should normally be examined.
    probe: insmod parameter. 
      A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), 
      the second is the address. These addresses are also probed, as if they 
      were in the 'normal' list.
-   probe_range: insmod parameter. 
-     A list of triples. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), 
-     the second and third are addresses.  These form an inclusive range of 
-     addresses that are also probed, as if they were in the 'normal' list.
    ignore: insmod parameter.
      A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), 
      the second is the I2C address. These addresses are never probed. 
      This parameter overrules 'normal' and 'probe', but not the 'force' lists.
-   ignore_range: insmod parameter. 
-     A list of triples. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus), 
-     the second and third are addresses. These form an inclusive range of 
-     I2C addresses that are never probed.
-     This parameter overrules 'normal' and 'probe', but not the 'force' lists.
    force: insmod parameter. 
      A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (-1 for any I2C bus),
      the second is the I2C address. A device is blindly assumed to be on
      the given address, no probing is done. 
 
-Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal' 
-and/or `normal_range' parameters. The complete declaration could look
-like this:
+Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal_i2c' 
+parameter. The complete declaration could look like this:
 
-  /* Scan 0x20 to 0x2f, 0x37, and 0x40 to 0x4f */
-  static unsigned short normal_i2c[] = { 0x37,I2C_CLIENT_END }; 
-  static unsigned short normal_i2c_range[] = { 0x20, 0x2f, 0x40, 0x4f, 
-                                               I2C_CLIENT_END };
+  /* Scan 0x37, and 0x48 to 0x4f */
+  static unsigned short normal_i2c[] = { 0x37, 0x48, 0x49, 0x4a, 0x4b, 0x4c,
+                                         0x4d, 0x4e, 0x4f, I2C_CLIENT_END };
 
   /* Magic definition of all other variables and things */
   I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD;
 
-Note that you *have* to call the two defined variables `normal_i2c' and
-`normal_i2c_range', without any prefix!
+Note that you *have* to call the defined variable `normal_i2c',
+without any prefix!
 
 
 Probing classes (sensors)
@@ -223,39 +202,17 @@ The following lists are used internally. They are all lists of integers.
 
    normal_i2c: filled in by the module writer. Terminated by SENSORS_I2C_END.
      A list of I2C addresses which should normally be examined.
-   normal_i2c_range: filled in by the module writer. Terminated by 
-     SENSORS_I2C_END
-     A list of pairs of I2C addresses, each pair being an inclusive range of
-     addresses which should normally be examined.
    normal_isa: filled in by the module writer. Terminated by SENSORS_ISA_END.
      A list of ISA addresses which should normally be examined.
-   normal_isa_range: filled in by the module writer. Terminated by 
-     SENSORS_ISA_END
-     A list of triples. The first two elements are ISA addresses, being an
-     range of addresses which should normally be examined. The third is the
-     modulo parameter: only addresses which are 0 module this value relative
-     to the first address of the range are actually considered.
    probe: insmod parameter. Initialize this list with SENSORS_I2C_END values.
      A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (SENSORS_ISA_BUS for
      the ISA bus, -1 for any I2C bus), the second is the address. These
      addresses are also probed, as if they were in the 'normal' list.
-   probe_range: insmod parameter. Initialize this list with SENSORS_I2C_END 
-     values.
-     A list of triples. The first value is a bus number (SENSORS_ISA_BUS for
-     the ISA bus, -1 for any I2C bus), the second and third are addresses. 
-     These form an inclusive range of addresses that are also probed, as
-     if they were in the 'normal' list.
    ignore: insmod parameter. Initialize this list with SENSORS_I2C_END values.
      A list of pairs. The first value is a bus number (SENSORS_ISA_BUS for
      the ISA bus, -1 for any I2C bus), the second is the I2C address. These
      addresses are never probed. This parameter overrules 'normal' and 
      'probe', but not the 'force' lists.
-   ignore_range: insmod parameter. Initialize this list with SENSORS_I2C_END 
-      values.
-     A list of triples. The first value is a bus number (SENSORS_ISA_BUS for
-     the ISA bus, -1 for any I2C bus), the second and third are addresses. 
-     These form an inclusive range of I2C addresses that are never probed.
-     This parameter overrules 'normal' and 'probe', but not the 'force' lists.
 
 Also used is a list of pointers to sensors_force_data structures:
    force_data: insmod parameters. A list, ending with an element of which
@@ -269,16 +226,14 @@ Also used is a list of pointers to sensors_force_data structures:
 So we have a generic insmod variabled `force', and chip-specific variables
 `force_CHIPNAME'.
 
-Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal' 
-and/or `normal_range' parameters, and define what chip names are used. 
+Fortunately, as a module writer, you just have to define the `normal_i2c' 
+and `normal_isa' parameters, and define what chip names are used. 
 The complete declaration could look like this:
-  /* Scan i2c addresses 0x20 to 0x2f, 0x37, and 0x40 to 0x4f
-  static unsigned short normal_i2c[] = {0x37,SENSORS_I2C_END};
-  static unsigned short normal_i2c_range[] = {0x20,0x2f,0x40,0x4f,
-                                              SENSORS_I2C_END};
+  /* Scan i2c addresses 0x37, and 0x48 to 0x4f */
+  static unsigned short normal_i2c[] = { 0x37, 0x48, 0x49, 0x4a, 0x4b, 0x4c,
+                                         0x4d, 0x4e, 0x4f, I2C_CLIENT_END };
   /* Scan ISA address 0x290 */
   static unsigned int normal_isa[] = {0x0290,SENSORS_ISA_END};
-  static unsigned int normal_isa_range[] = {SENSORS_ISA_END};
 
   /* Define chips foo and bar, as well as all module parameters and things */
   SENSORS_INSMOD_2(foo,bar);

Documentation/infiniband/core_locking.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+INFINIBAND MIDLAYER LOCKING
+
+  This guide is an attempt to make explicit the locking assumptions
+  made by the InfiniBand midlayer.  It describes the requirements on
+  both low-level drivers that sit below the midlayer and upper level
+  protocols that use the midlayer.
+
+Sleeping and interrupt context
+
+  With the following exceptions, a low-level driver implementation of
+  all of the methods in struct ib_device may sleep.  The exceptions
+  are any methods from the list:
+
+    create_ah
+    modify_ah
+    query_ah
+    destroy_ah
+    bind_mw
+    post_send
+    post_recv
+    poll_cq
+    req_notify_cq
+    map_phys_fmr
+
+  which may not sleep and must be callable from any context.
+
+  The corresponding functions exported to upper level protocol
+  consumers:
+
+    ib_create_ah
+    ib_modify_ah
+    ib_query_ah
+    ib_destroy_ah
+    ib_bind_mw
+    ib_post_send
+    ib_post_recv
+    ib_req_notify_cq
+    ib_map_phys_fmr
+
+  are therefore safe to call from any context.
+
+  In addition, the function
+
+    ib_dispatch_event
+
+  used by low-level drivers to dispatch asynchronous events through
+  the midlayer is also safe to call from any context.
+
+Reentrancy
+
+  All of the methods in struct ib_device exported by a low-level
+  driver must be fully reentrant.  The low-level driver is required to
+  perform all synchronization necessary to maintain consistency, even
+  if multiple function calls using the same object are run
+  simultaneously.
+
+  The IB midlayer does not perform any serialization of function calls.
+
+  Because low-level drivers are reentrant, upper level protocol
+  consumers are not required to perform any serialization.  However,
+  some serialization may be required to get sensible results.  For
+  example, a consumer may safely call ib_poll_cq() on multiple CPUs
+  simultaneously.  However, the ordering of the work completion
+  information between different calls of ib_poll_cq() is not defined.
+
+Callbacks
+
+  A low-level driver must not perform a callback directly from the
+  same callchain as an ib_device method call.  For example, it is not
+  allowed for a low-level driver to call a consumer's completion event
+  handler directly from its post_send method.  Instead, the low-level
+  driver should defer this callback by, for example, scheduling a
+  tasklet to perform the callback.
+
+  The low-level driver is responsible for ensuring that multiple
+  completion event handlers for the same CQ are not called
+  simultaneously.  The driver must guarantee that only one CQ event
+  handler for a given CQ is running at a time.  In other words, the
+  following situation is not allowed:
+
+        CPU1                                    CPU2
+
+  low-level driver ->
+    consumer CQ event callback:
+      /* ... */
+      ib_req_notify_cq(cq, ...);
+                                        low-level driver ->
+      /* ... */                           consumer CQ event callback:
+                                            /* ... */
+      return from CQ event handler
+
+  The context in which completion event and asynchronous event
+  callbacks run is not defined.  Depending on the low-level driver, it
+  may be process context, softirq context, or interrupt context.
+  Upper level protocol consumers may not sleep in a callback.
+
+Hot-plug
+
+  A low-level driver announces that a device is ready for use by
+  consumers when it calls ib_register_device(), all initialization
+  must be complete before this call.  The device must remain usable
+  until the driver's call to ib_unregister_device() has returned.
+
+  A low-level driver must call ib_register_device() and
+  ib_unregister_device() from process context.  It must not hold any
+  semaphores that could cause deadlock if a consumer calls back into
+  the driver across these calls.
+
+  An upper level protocol consumer may begin using an IB device as
+  soon as the add method of its struct ib_client is called for that
+  device.  A consumer must finish all cleanup and free all resources
+  relating to a device before returning from the remove method.
+
+  A consumer is permitted to sleep in its add and remove methods.

Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt

@@ -28,13 +28,37 @@ Creating MAD agents
 
 Receiving MADs
 
-  MADs are received using read().  The buffer passed to read() must be
-  large enough to hold at least one struct ib_user_mad.  For example:
+  MADs are received using read().  The receive side now supports
+  RMPP. The buffer passed to read() must be at least one
+  struct ib_user_mad + 256 bytes. For example:
 
-	struct ib_user_mad mad;
-	ret = read(fd, &mad, sizeof mad);
-	if (ret != sizeof mad)
+  If the buffer passed is not large enough to hold the received
+  MAD (RMPP), the errno is set to ENOSPC and the length of the
+  buffer needed is set in mad.length.
+
+  Example for normal MAD (non RMPP) reads:
+	struct ib_user_mad *mad;
+	mad = malloc(sizeof *mad + 256);
+	ret = read(fd, mad, sizeof *mad + 256);
+	if (ret != sizeof mad + 256) {
 		perror("read");
+		free(mad);
+	}
+
+  Example for RMPP reads:
+	struct ib_user_mad *mad;
+	mad = malloc(sizeof *mad + 256);
+	ret = read(fd, mad, sizeof *mad + 256);
+	if (ret == -ENOSPC)) {
+		length = mad.length;
+		free(mad);
+		mad = malloc(sizeof *mad + length);
+		ret = read(fd, mad, sizeof *mad + length);
+	}
+	if (ret < 0) {
+		perror("read");
+		free(mad);
+	}
 
   In addition to the actual MAD contents, the other struct ib_user_mad
   fields will be filled in with information on the received MAD.  For
@@ -50,18 +74,21 @@ Sending MADs
 
   MADs are sent using write().  The agent ID for sending should be
   filled into the id field of the MAD, the destination LID should be
-  filled into the lid field, and so on.  For example:
+  filled into the lid field, and so on.  The send side does support
+  RMPP so arbitrary length MAD can be sent. For example:
 
-	struct ib_user_mad mad;
+	struct ib_user_mad *mad;
 
-	/* fill in mad.data */
+	mad = malloc(sizeof *mad + mad_length);
 
-	mad.id  = my_agent;	/* req.id from agent registration */
-	mad.lid = my_dest;	/* in network byte order... */
+	/* fill in mad->data */
+
+	mad->hdr.id  = my_agent;	/* req.id from agent registration */
+	mad->hdr.lid = my_dest;		/* in network byte order... */
 	/* etc. */
 
-	ret = write(fd, &mad, sizeof mad);
-	if (ret != sizeof mad)
+	ret = write(fd, &mad, sizeof *mad + mad_length);
+	if (ret != sizeof *mad + mad_length)
 		perror("write");
 
 Setting IsSM Capability Bit

Documentation/infiniband/user_verbs.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+USERSPACE VERBS ACCESS
+
+  The ib_uverbs module, built by enabling CONFIG_INFINIBAND_USER_VERBS,
+  enables direct userspace access to IB hardware via "verbs," as
+  described in chapter 11 of the InfiniBand Architecture Specification.
+
+  To use the verbs, the libibverbs library, available from
+  <http://openib.org/>, is required.  libibverbs contains a
+  device-independent API for using the ib_uverbs interface.
+  libibverbs also requires appropriate device-dependent kernel and
+  userspace driver for your InfiniBand hardware.  For example, to use
+  a Mellanox HCA, you will need the ib_mthca kernel module and the
+  libmthca userspace driver be installed.
+
+User-kernel communication
+
+  Userspace communicates with the kernel for slow path, resource
+  management operations via the /dev/infiniband/uverbsN character
+  devices.  Fast path operations are typically performed by writing
+  directly to hardware registers mmap()ed into userspace, with no
+  system call or context switch into the kernel.
+
+  Commands are sent to the kernel via write()s on these device files.
+  The ABI is defined in drivers/infiniband/include/ib_user_verbs.h.
+  The structs for commands that require a response from the kernel
+  contain a 64-bit field used to pass a pointer to an output buffer.
+  Status is returned to userspace as the return value of the write()
+  system call.
+
+Resource management
+
+  Since creation and destruction of all IB resources is done by
+  commands passed through a file descriptor, the kernel can keep track
+  of which resources are attached to a given userspace context.  The
+  ib_uverbs module maintains idr tables that are used to translate
+  between kernel pointers and opaque userspace handles, so that kernel
+  pointers are never exposed to userspace and userspace cannot trick
+  the kernel into following a bogus pointer.
+
+  This also allows the kernel to clean up when a process exits and
+  prevent one process from touching another process's resources.
+
+Memory pinning
+
+  Direct userspace I/O requires that memory regions that are potential
+  I/O targets be kept resident at the same physical address.  The
+  ib_uverbs module manages pinning and unpinning memory regions via
+  get_user_pages() and put_page() calls.  It also accounts for the
+  amount of memory pinned in the process's locked_vm, and checks that
+  unprivileged processes do not exceed their RLIMIT_MEMLOCK limit.
+
+  Pages that are pinned multiple times are counted each time they are
+  pinned, so the value of locked_vm may be an overestimate of the
+  number of pages pinned by a process.
+
+/dev files
+
+  To create the appropriate character device files automatically with
+  udev, a rule like
+
+    KERNEL="uverbs*", NAME="infiniband/%k"
+
+  can be used.  This will create device nodes named
+
+    /dev/infiniband/uverbs0
+
+  and so on.  Since the InfiniBand userspace verbs should be safe for
+  use by non-privileged processes, it may be useful to add an
+  appropriate MODE or GROUP to the udev rule.

Documentation/kdump/gdbmacros.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+#
+# This file contains a few gdb macros (user defined commands) to extract
+# useful information from kernel crashdump (kdump) like stack traces of
+# all the processes or a particular process and trapinfo.
+#
+# These macros can be used by copying this file in .gdbinit (put in home
+# directory or current directory) or by invoking gdb command with
+# --command=<command-file-name> option
+#
+# Credits:
+# Alexander Nyberg <alexn@telia.com>
+# V Srivatsa <vatsa@in.ibm.com>
+# Maneesh Soni <maneesh@in.ibm.com>
+#
+
+define bttnobp
+	set $tasks_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->tasks)
+	set $pid_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->pids[1].pid_list.next)
+	set $init_t=&init_task
+	set $next_t=(((char *)($init_t->tasks).next) - $tasks_off)
+	while ($next_t != $init_t)
+		set $next_t=(struct task_struct *)$next_t
+		printf "\npid %d; comm %s:\n", $next_t.pid, $next_t.comm
+		printf "===================\n"
+		set var $stackp = $next_t.thread.esp
+		set var $stack_top = ($stackp & ~4095) + 4096
+
+		while ($stackp < $stack_top)
+			if (*($stackp) > _stext && *($stackp) < _sinittext)
+				info symbol *($stackp)
+			end
+			set $stackp += 4
+		end
+		set $next_th=(((char *)$next_t->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off)
+		while ($next_th != $next_t)
+			set $next_th=(struct task_struct *)$next_th
+			printf "\npid %d; comm %s:\n", $next_t.pid, $next_t.comm
+			printf "===================\n"
+			set var $stackp = $next_t.thread.esp
+			set var $stack_top = ($stackp & ~4095) + 4096
+
+			while ($stackp < $stack_top)
+				if (*($stackp) > _stext && *($stackp) < _sinittext)
+					info symbol *($stackp)
+				end
+				set $stackp += 4
+			end
+			set $next_th=(((char *)$next_th->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off)
+		end
+		set $next_t=(char *)($next_t->tasks.next) - $tasks_off
+	end
+end
+document bttnobp
+	dump all thread stack traces on a kernel compiled with !CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER
+end
+
+define btt
+	set $tasks_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->tasks)
+	set $pid_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->pids[1].pid_list.next)
+	set $init_t=&init_task
+	set $next_t=(((char *)($init_t->tasks).next) - $tasks_off)
+	while ($next_t != $init_t)
+		set $next_t=(struct task_struct *)$next_t
+		printf "\npid %d; comm %s:\n", $next_t.pid, $next_t.comm
+		printf "===================\n"
+		set var $stackp = $next_t.thread.esp
+		set var $stack_top = ($stackp & ~4095) + 4096
+		set var $stack_bot = ($stackp & ~4095)
+
+		set $stackp = *($stackp)
+		while (($stackp < $stack_top) && ($stackp > $stack_bot))
+			set var $addr = *($stackp + 4)
+			info symbol $addr
+			set $stackp = *($stackp)
+		end
+
+		set $next_th=(((char *)$next_t->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off)
+		while ($next_th != $next_t)
+			set $next_th=(struct task_struct *)$next_th
+			printf "\npid %d; comm %s:\n", $next_t.pid, $next_t.comm
+			printf "===================\n"
+			set var $stackp = $next_t.thread.esp
+			set var $stack_top = ($stackp & ~4095) + 4096
+			set var $stack_bot = ($stackp & ~4095)
+
+			set $stackp = *($stackp)
+			while (($stackp < $stack_top) && ($stackp > $stack_bot))
+				set var $addr = *($stackp + 4)
+				info symbol $addr
+				set $stackp = *($stackp)
+			end
+			set $next_th=(((char *)$next_th->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off)
+		end
+		set $next_t=(char *)($next_t->tasks.next) - $tasks_off
+	end
+end
+document btt
+	dump all thread stack traces on a kernel compiled with CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER
+end
+
+define btpid
+	set var $pid = $arg0
+	set $tasks_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->tasks)
+	set $pid_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->pids[1].pid_list.next)
+	set $init_t=&init_task
+	set $next_t=(((char *)($init_t->tasks).next) - $tasks_off)
+	set var $pid_task = 0
+
+	while ($next_t != $init_t)
+		set $next_t=(struct task_struct *)$next_t
+
+		if ($next_t.pid == $pid)
+			set $pid_task = $next_t
+		end
+
+		set $next_th=(((char *)$next_t->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off)
+		while ($next_th != $next_t)
+			set $next_th=(struct task_struct *)$next_th
+			if ($next_th.pid == $pid)
+				set $pid_task = $next_th
+			end
+			set $next_th=(((char *)$next_th->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off)
+		end
+		set $next_t=(char *)($next_t->tasks.next) - $tasks_off
+	end
+
+	printf "\npid %d; comm %s:\n", $pid_task.pid, $pid_task.comm
+	printf "===================\n"
+	set var $stackp = $pid_task.thread.esp
+	set var $stack_top = ($stackp & ~4095) + 4096
+	set var $stack_bot = ($stackp & ~4095)
+
+	set $stackp = *($stackp)
+	while (($stackp < $stack_top) && ($stackp > $stack_bot))
+		set var $addr = *($stackp + 4)
+		info symbol $addr
+		set $stackp = *($stackp)
+	end
+end
+document btpid
+	backtrace of pid
+end
+
+
+define trapinfo
+	set var $pid = $arg0
+	set $tasks_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->tasks)
+	set $pid_off=((size_t)&((struct task_struct *)0)->pids[1].pid_list.next)
+	set $init_t=&init_task
+	set $next_t=(((char *)($init_t->tasks).next) - $tasks_off)
+	set var $pid_task = 0
+
+	while ($next_t != $init_t)
+		set $next_t=(struct task_struct *)$next_t
+
+		if ($next_t.pid == $pid)
+			set $pid_task = $next_t
+		end
+
+		set $next_th=(((char *)$next_t->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off)
+		while ($next_th != $next_t)
+			set $next_th=(struct task_struct *)$next_th
+			if ($next_th.pid == $pid)
+				set $pid_task = $next_th
+			end
+			set $next_th=(((char *)$next_th->pids[1].pid_list.next) - $pid_off)
+		end
+		set $next_t=(char *)($next_t->tasks.next) - $tasks_off
+	end
+
+	printf "Trapno %ld, cr2 0x%lx, error_code %ld\n", $pid_task.thread.trap_no, \
+				$pid_task.thread.cr2, $pid_task.thread.error_code
+
+end
+document trapinfo
+	Run info threads and lookup pid of thread #1
+	'trapinfo <pid>' will tell you by which trap & possibly
+	addresthe kernel paniced.
+end

Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+Documentation for kdump - the kexec-based crash dumping solution
+================================================================
+
+DESIGN
+======
+
+Kdump uses kexec to reboot to a second kernel whenever a dump needs to be taken.
+This second kernel is booted with very little memory. The first kernel reserves
+the section of memory that the second kernel uses. This ensures that on-going
+DMA from the first kernel does not corrupt the second kernel.
+
+All the necessary information about Core image is encoded in ELF format and
+stored in reserved area of memory before crash. Physical address of start of
+ELF header is passed to new kernel through command line parameter elfcorehdr=.
+
+On i386, the first 640 KB of physical memory is needed to boot, irrespective
+of where the kernel loads. Hence, this region is backed up by kexec just before
+rebooting into the new kernel.
+
+In the second kernel, "old memory" can be accessed in two ways.
+
+- The first one is through a /dev/oldmem device interface. A capture utility
+  can read the device file and write out the memory in raw format. This is raw
+  dump of memory and analysis/capture tool should be intelligent enough to
+  determine where to look for the right information. ELF headers (elfcorehdr=)
+  can become handy here.
+
+- The second interface is through /proc/vmcore. This exports the dump as an ELF
+  format file which can be written out using any file copy command
+  (cp, scp, etc). Further, gdb can be used to perform limited debugging on
+  the dump file. This method ensures methods ensure that there is correct
+  ordering of the dump pages (corresponding to the first 640 KB that has been
+  relocated).
+
+SETUP
+=====
+
+1) Download http://www.xmission.com/~ebiederm/files/kexec/kexec-tools-1.101.tar.gz
+   and apply http://lse.sourceforge.net/kdump/patches/kexec-tools-1.101-kdump.patch
+   and after that build the source.
+
+2) Download and build the appropriate (latest) kexec/kdump (-mm) kernel
+   patchset and apply it to the vanilla kernel tree.
+
+   Two kernels need to be built in order to get this feature working.
+
+  A) First kernel:
+   a) Enable "kexec system call" feature (in Processor type and features).
+	CONFIG_KEXEC=y
+   b) This kernel's physical load address should be the default value of
+      0x100000 (0x100000, 1 MB) (in Processor type and features).
+	CONFIG_PHYSICAL_START=0x100000
+   c) Enable "sysfs file system support" (in Pseudo filesystems).
+	CONFIG_SYSFS=y
+   d) Boot into first kernel with the command line parameter "crashkernel=Y@X".
+      Use appropriate values for X and Y. Y denotes how much memory to reserve
+      for the second kernel, and X denotes at what physical address the reserved
+      memory section starts. For example: "crashkernel=64M@16M".
+
+  B) Second kernel:
+   a) Enable "kernel crash dumps" feature (in Processor type and features).
+	CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y
+   b) Specify a suitable value for "Physical address where the kernel is
+      loaded" (in Processor type and features). Typically this value
+      should be same as X (See option d) above, e.g., 16 MB or 0x1000000.
+	CONFIG_PHYSICAL_START=0x1000000
+   c) Enable "/proc/vmcore support" (Optional, in Pseudo filesystems).
+	CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE=y
+   d) Disable SMP support and build a UP kernel (Until it is fixed).
+   	CONFIG_SMP=n
+   e) Enable "Local APIC support on uniprocessors".
+   	CONFIG_X86_UP_APIC=y
+   f) Enable "IO-APIC support on uniprocessors"
+   	CONFIG_X86_UP_IOAPIC=y
+
+  Note:   i) Options a) and b) depend upon "Configure standard kernel features
+	     (for small systems)" (under General setup).
+	 ii) Option a) also depends on CONFIG_HIGHMEM (under Processor
+		type and features).
+	iii) Both option a) and b) are under "Processor type and features".
+
+3) Boot into the first kernel. You are now ready to try out kexec-based crash
+   dumps.
+
+4) Load the second kernel to be booted using:
+
+   kexec -p <second-kernel> --crash-dump --args-linux --append="root=<root-dev>
+   init 1 irqpoll"
+
+   Note: i) <second-kernel> has to be a vmlinux image. bzImage will not work,
+	    as of now.
+	ii) By default ELF headers are stored in ELF32 format (for i386). This
+	    is sufficient to represent the physical memory up to 4GB. To store
+	    headers in ELF64 format, specifiy "--elf64-core-headers" on the
+	    kexec command line additionally.
+       iii) Specify "irqpoll" as command line parameter. This reduces driver
+            initialization failures in second kernel due to shared interrupts.
+
+5) System reboots into the second kernel when a panic occurs. A module can be
+   written to force the panic or "ALT-SysRq-c" can be used initiate a crash
+   dump for testing purposes.
+
+6) Write out the dump file using
+
+   cp /proc/vmcore <dump-file>
+
+   Dump memory can also be accessed as a /dev/oldmem device for a linear/raw
+   view.  To create the device, type:
+
+   mknod /dev/oldmem c 1 12
+
+   Use "dd" with suitable options for count, bs and skip to access specific
+   portions of the dump.
+
+   Entire memory:  dd if=/dev/oldmem of=oldmem.001
+
+ANALYSIS
+========
+
+Limited analysis can be done using gdb on the dump file copied out of
+/proc/vmcore. Use vmlinux built with -g and run
+
+  gdb vmlinux <dump-file>
+
+Stack trace for the task on processor 0, register display, memory display
+work fine.
+
+Note: gdb cannot analyse core files generated in ELF64 format for i386.
+
+TODO
+====
+
+1) Provide a kernel pages filtering mechanism so that core file size is not
+   insane on systems having huge memory banks.
+2) Modify "crash" tool to make it recognize this dump.
+
+CONTACT
+=======
+
+Vivek Goyal (vgoyal@in.ibm.com)
+Maneesh Soni (maneesh@in.ibm.com)

Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt

@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ restrictions referred to are that the relevant option is valid if:
 	IA-32	IA-32 aka i386 architecture is enabled.
 	IA-64	IA-64 architecture is enabled.
 	IOSCHED	More than one I/O scheduler is enabled.
-	IP_PNP	IP DCHP, BOOTP, or RARP is enabled.
+	IP_PNP	IP DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP is enabled.
 	ISAPNP	ISA PnP code is enabled.
 	ISDN	Appropriate ISDN support is enabled.
 	JOY	Appropriate joystick support is enabled.
@@ -159,6 +159,11 @@ running once the system is up.
 
 	acpi_fake_ecdt	[HW,ACPI] Workaround failure due to BIOS lacking ECDT
 
+	acpi_generic_hotkey [HW,ACPI]
+			Allow consolidated generic hotkey driver to
+			over-ride platform specific driver.
+			See also Documentation/acpi-hotkey.txt.
+
 	ad1816=		[HW,OSS]
 			Format: <io>,<irq>,<dma>,<dma2>
 			See also Documentation/sound/oss/AD1816.
@@ -358,6 +363,10 @@ running once the system is up.
 	cpia_pp=	[HW,PPT]
 			Format: { parport<nr> | auto | none }
 
+	crashkernel=nn[KMG]@ss[KMG]
+			[KNL] Reserve a chunk of physical memory to
+			hold a kernel to switch to with kexec on panic.
+
 	cs4232=		[HW,OSS]
 			Format: <io>,<irq>,<dma>,<dma2>,<mpuio>,<mpuirq>
 
@@ -447,6 +456,10 @@ running once the system is up.
 			Format: {"as"|"cfq"|"deadline"|"noop"}
 			See Documentation/block/as-iosched.txt
 			and Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt for details.
+	elfcorehdr=	[IA-32]
+			Specifies physical address of start of kernel core image
+			elf header.
+			See Documentation/kdump.txt for details.
 
 	enforcing	[SELINUX] Set initial enforcing status.
 			Format: {"0" | "1"}
@@ -548,6 +561,9 @@ running once the system is up.
 
 	i810=		[HW,DRM]
 
+	i8k.ignore_dmi	[HW] Continue probing hardware even if DMI data
+			indicates that the driver is running on unsupported
+			hardware.
 	i8k.force	[HW] Activate i8k driver even if SMM BIOS signature
 			does not match list of supported models.
 	i8k.power_status
@@ -611,6 +627,17 @@ running once the system is up.
 	ips=		[HW,SCSI] Adaptec / IBM ServeRAID controller
 			See header of drivers/scsi/ips.c.
 
+	irqfixup	[HW]
+			When an interrupt is not handled search all handlers
+			for it. Intended to get systems with badly broken
+			firmware running.
+
+	irqpoll		[HW]
+			When an interrupt is not handled search all handlers
+			for it. Also check all handlers each timer
+			interrupt. Intended to get systems with badly broken
+			firmware running.
+
 	isapnp=		[ISAPNP]
 			Format: <RDP>, <reset>, <pci_scan>, <verbosity>
 
@@ -736,6 +763,9 @@ running once the system is up.
 	maxcpus=	[SMP] Maximum number of processors that	an SMP kernel
 			should make use of
 
+	max_addr=[KMG]	[KNL,BOOT,ia64] All physical memory greater than or
+			equal to this physical address is ignored.
+
 	max_luns=	[SCSI] Maximum number of LUNs to probe
 			Should be between 1 and 2^32-1.
 
@@ -1019,6 +1049,10 @@ running once the system is up.
 		irqmask=0xMMMM		[IA-32] Set a bit mask of IRQs allowed to be assigned
 					automatically to PCI devices. You can make the kernel
 					exclude IRQs of your ISA cards this way.
+		pirqaddr=0xAAAAA	[IA-32] Specify the physical address
+					of the PIRQ table (normally generated
+					by the BIOS) if it is outside the
+					F0000h-100000h range.
 		lastbus=N		[IA-32] Scan all buses till bus #N. Can be useful
 					if the kernel is unable to find your secondary buses
 					and you want to tell it explicitly which ones they are.
@@ -1104,7 +1138,7 @@ running once the system is up.
 			See Documentation/ramdisk.txt.
 
 	psmouse.proto=  [HW,MOUSE] Highest PS2 mouse protocol extension to
-			probe for (bare|imps|exps).
+			probe for (bare|imps|exps|lifebook|any).
 	psmouse.rate=	[HW,MOUSE] Set desired mouse report rate, in reports
 			per second.
 	psmouse.resetafter=

Documentation/keys.txt

@@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ This document has the following sections:
 	- New procfs files
 	- Userspace system call interface
 	- Kernel services
+	- Notes on accessing payload contents
 	- Defining a key type
 	- Request-key callback service
 	- Key access filesystem
@@ -45,27 +46,26 @@ Each key has a number of attributes:
 	- State.
 
 
- (*) Each key is issued a serial number of type key_serial_t that is unique
-     for the lifetime of that key. All serial numbers are positive non-zero
-     32-bit integers.
+ (*) Each key is issued a serial number of type key_serial_t that is unique for
+     the lifetime of that key. All serial numbers are positive non-zero 32-bit
+     integers.
 
      Userspace programs can use a key's serial numbers as a way to gain access
      to it, subject to permission checking.
 
  (*) Each key is of a defined "type". Types must be registered inside the
-     kernel by a kernel service (such as a filesystem) before keys of that
-     type can be added or used. Userspace programs cannot define new types
-     directly.
+     kernel by a kernel service (such as a filesystem) before keys of that type
+     can be added or used. Userspace programs cannot define new types directly.
 
-     Key types are represented in the kernel by struct key_type. This defines
-     a number of operations that can be performed on a key of that type.
+     Key types are represented in the kernel by struct key_type. This defines a
+     number of operations that can be performed on a key of that type.
 
      Should a type be removed from the system, all the keys of that type will
      be invalidated.
 
  (*) Each key has a description. This should be a printable string. The key
-     type provides an operation to perform a match between the description on
-     a key and a criterion string.
+     type provides an operation to perform a match between the description on a
+     key and a criterion string.
 
  (*) Each key has an owner user ID, a group ID and a permissions mask. These
      are used to control what a process may do to a key from userspace, and
@@ -74,10 +74,10 @@ Each key has a number of attributes:
  (*) Each key can be set to expire at a specific time by the key type's
      instantiation function. Keys can also be immortal.
 
- (*) Each key can have a payload. This is a quantity of data that represent
-     the actual "key". In the case of a keyring, this is a list of keys to
-     which the keyring links; in the case of a user-defined key, it's an
-     arbitrary blob of data.
+ (*) Each key can have a payload. This is a quantity of data that represent the
+     actual "key". In the case of a keyring, this is a list of keys to which
+     the keyring links; in the case of a user-defined key, it's an arbitrary
+     blob of data.
 
      Having a payload is not required; and the payload can, in fact, just be a
      value stored in the struct key itself.
@@ -92,8 +92,8 @@ Each key has a number of attributes:
 
  (*) Each key can be in one of a number of basic states:
 
-     (*) Uninstantiated. The key exists, but does not have any data
-	 attached. Keys being requested from userspace will be in this state.
+     (*) Uninstantiated. The key exists, but does not have any data attached.
+     	 Keys being requested from userspace will be in this state.
 
      (*) Instantiated. This is the normal state. The key is fully formed, and
 	 has data attached.
@@ -140,10 +140,10 @@ The key service provides a number of features besides keys:
      clone, fork, vfork or execve occurs. A new keyring is created only when
      required.
 
-     The process-specific keyring is replaced with an empty one in the child
-     on clone, fork, vfork unless CLONE_THREAD is supplied, in which case it
-     is shared. execve also discards the process's process keyring and creates
-     a new one.
+     The process-specific keyring is replaced with an empty one in the child on
+     clone, fork, vfork unless CLONE_THREAD is supplied, in which case it is
+     shared. execve also discards the process's process keyring and creates a
+     new one.
 
      The session-specific keyring is persistent across clone, fork, vfork and
      execve, even when the latter executes a set-UID or set-GID binary. A
@@ -177,11 +177,11 @@ The key service provides a number of features besides keys:
      If a system call that modifies a key or keyring in some way would put the
      user over quota, the operation is refused and error EDQUOT is returned.
 
- (*) There's a system call interface by which userspace programs can create
-     and manipulate keys and keyrings.
+ (*) There's a system call interface by which userspace programs can create and
+     manipulate keys and keyrings.
 
- (*) There's a kernel interface by which services can register types and
-     search for keys.
+ (*) There's a kernel interface by which services can register types and search
+     for keys.
 
  (*) There's a way for the a search done from the kernel to call back to
      userspace to request a key that can't be found in a process's keyrings.
@@ -194,9 +194,9 @@ The key service provides a number of features besides keys:
 KEY ACCESS PERMISSIONS
 ======================
 
-Keys have an owner user ID, a group access ID, and a permissions mask. The
-mask has up to eight bits each for user, group and other access. Only five of
-each set of eight bits are defined. These permissions granted are:
+Keys have an owner user ID, a group access ID, and a permissions mask. The mask
+has up to eight bits each for user, group and other access. Only five of each
+set of eight bits are defined. These permissions granted are:
 
  (*) View
 
@@ -210,8 +210,8 @@ each set of eight bits are defined. These permissions granted are:
 
  (*) Write
 
-     This permits a key's payload to be instantiated or updated, or it allows
-     a link to be added to or removed from a keyring.
+     This permits a key's payload to be instantiated or updated, or it allows a
+     link to be added to or removed from a keyring.
 
  (*) Search
 
@@ -238,8 +238,8 @@ about the status of the key service:
  (*) /proc/keys
 
      This lists all the keys on the system, giving information about their
-     type, description and permissions. The payload of the key is not
-     available this way:
+     type, description and permissions. The payload of the key is not available
+     this way:
 
 	SERIAL   FLAGS  USAGE EXPY PERM   UID   GID   TYPE      DESCRIPTION: SUMMARY
 	00000001 I-----    39 perm 1f0000     0     0 keyring   _uid_ses.0: 1/4
@@ -318,21 +318,21 @@ The main syscalls are:
      If a key of the same type and description as that proposed already exists
      in the keyring, this will try to update it with the given payload, or it
      will return error EEXIST if that function is not supported by the key
-     type. The process must also have permission to write to the key to be
-     able to update it. The new key will have all user permissions granted and
-     no group or third party permissions.
+     type. The process must also have permission to write to the key to be able
+     to update it. The new key will have all user permissions granted and no
+     group or third party permissions.
 
-     Otherwise, this will attempt to create a new key of the specified type
-     and description, and to instantiate it with the supplied payload and
-     attach it to the keyring. In this case, an error will be generated if the
-     process does not have permission to write to the keyring.
+     Otherwise, this will attempt to create a new key of the specified type and
+     description, and to instantiate it with the supplied payload and attach it
+     to the keyring. In this case, an error will be generated if the process
+     does not have permission to write to the keyring.
 
      The payload is optional, and the pointer can be NULL if not required by
      the type. The payload is plen in size, and plen can be zero for an empty
      payload.
 
-     A new keyring can be generated by setting type "keyring", the keyring
-     name as the description (or NULL) and setting the payload to NULL.
+     A new keyring can be generated by setting type "keyring", the keyring name
+     as the description (or NULL) and setting the payload to NULL.
 
      User defined keys can be created by specifying type "user". It is
      recommended that a user defined key's description by prefixed with a type
@@ -369,9 +369,9 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
 	key_serial_t keyctl(KEYCTL_GET_KEYRING_ID, key_serial_t id,
 			    int create);
 
-     The special key specified by "id" is looked up (with the key being
-     created if necessary) and the ID of the key or keyring thus found is
-     returned if it exists.
+     The special key specified by "id" is looked up (with the key being created
+     if necessary) and the ID of the key or keyring thus found is returned if
+     it exists.
 
      If the key does not yet exist, the key will be created if "create" is
      non-zero; and the error ENOKEY will be returned if "create" is zero.
@@ -402,8 +402,8 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
 
      This will try to update the specified key with the given payload, or it
      will return error EOPNOTSUPP if that function is not supported by the key
-     type. The process must also have permission to write to the key to be
-     able to update it.
+     type. The process must also have permission to write to the key to be able
+     to update it.
 
      The payload is of length plen, and may be absent or empty as for
      add_key().
@@ -422,8 +422,8 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
 
 	long keyctl(KEYCTL_CHOWN, key_serial_t key, uid_t uid, gid_t gid);
 
-     This function permits a key's owner and group ID to be changed. Either
-     one of uid or gid can be set to -1 to suppress that change.
+     This function permits a key's owner and group ID to be changed. Either one
+     of uid or gid can be set to -1 to suppress that change.
 
      Only the superuser can change a key's owner to something other than the
      key's current owner. Similarly, only the superuser can change a key's
@@ -484,12 +484,12 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
 
 	long keyctl(KEYCTL_LINK, key_serial_t keyring, key_serial_t key);
 
-     This function creates a link from the keyring to the key. The process
-     must have write permission on the keyring and must have link permission
-     on the key.
+     This function creates a link from the keyring to the key. The process must
+     have write permission on the keyring and must have link permission on the
+     key.
 
-     Should the keyring not be a keyring, error ENOTDIR will result; and if
-     the keyring is full, error ENFILE will result.
+     Should the keyring not be a keyring, error ENOTDIR will result; and if the
+     keyring is full, error ENFILE will result.
 
      The link procedure checks the nesting of the keyrings, returning ELOOP if
      it appears to deep or EDEADLK if the link would introduce a cycle.
@@ -503,8 +503,8 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
      specified key, and removes it if found. Subsequent links to that key are
      ignored. The process must have write permission on the keyring.
 
-     If the keyring is not a keyring, error ENOTDIR will result; and if the
-     key is not present, error ENOENT will be the result.
+     If the keyring is not a keyring, error ENOTDIR will result; and if the key
+     is not present, error ENOENT will be the result.
 
 
  (*) Search a keyring tree for a key:
@@ -513,9 +513,9 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
 			    const char *type, const char *description,
 			    key_serial_t dest_keyring);
 
-     This searches the keyring tree headed by the specified keyring until a
-     key is found that matches the type and description criteria. Each keyring
-     is checked for keys before recursion into its children occurs.
+     This searches the keyring tree headed by the specified keyring until a key
+     is found that matches the type and description criteria. Each keyring is
+     checked for keys before recursion into its children occurs.
 
      The process must have search permission on the top level keyring, or else
      error EACCES will result. Only keyrings that the process has search
@@ -549,8 +549,8 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
      As much of the data as can be fitted into the buffer will be copied to
      userspace if the buffer pointer is not NULL.
 
-     On a successful return, the function will always return the amount of
-     data available rather than the amount copied.
+     On a successful return, the function will always return the amount of data
+     available rather than the amount copied.
 
 
  (*) Instantiate a partially constructed key.
@@ -568,8 +568,8 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
      it, and the key must be uninstantiated.
 
      If a keyring is specified (non-zero), the key will also be linked into
-     that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply
-     in this case too.
+     that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply in
+     this case too.
 
      The payload and plen arguments describe the payload data as for add_key().
 
@@ -587,8 +587,39 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
      it, and the key must be uninstantiated.
 
      If a keyring is specified (non-zero), the key will also be linked into
-     that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply
-     in this case too.
+     that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply in
+     this case too.
+
+
+ (*) Set the default request-key destination keyring.
+
+	long keyctl(KEYCTL_SET_REQKEY_KEYRING, int reqkey_defl);
+
+     This sets the default keyring to which implicitly requested keys will be
+     attached for this thread. reqkey_defl should be one of these constants:
+
+	CONSTANT				VALUE	NEW DEFAULT KEYRING
+	======================================	======	=======================
+	KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_NO_CHANGE		-1	No change
+	KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_DEFAULT			0	Default[1]
+	KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_THREAD_KEYRING		1	Thread keyring
+	KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_PROCESS_KEYRING		2	Process keyring
+	KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_SESSION_KEYRING		3	Session keyring
+	KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_USER_KEYRING		4	User keyring
+	KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_USER_SESSION_KEYRING	5	User session keyring
+	KEY_REQKEY_DEFL_GROUP_KEYRING		6	Group keyring
+
+     The old default will be returned if successful and error EINVAL will be
+     returned if reqkey_defl is not one of the above values.
+
+     The default keyring can be overridden by the keyring indicated to the
+     request_key() system call.
+
+     Note that this setting is inherited across fork/exec.
+
+     [1] The default default is: the thread keyring if there is one, otherwise
+     the process keyring if there is one, otherwise the session keyring if
+     there is one, otherwise the user default session keyring.
 
 
 ===============
@@ -601,17 +632,14 @@ be broken down into two areas: keys and key types.
 Dealing with keys is fairly straightforward. Firstly, the kernel service
 registers its type, then it searches for a key of that type. It should retain
 the key as long as it has need of it, and then it should release it. For a
-filesystem or device file, a search would probably be performed during the
-open call, and the key released upon close. How to deal with conflicting keys
-due to two different users opening the same file is left to the filesystem
-author to solve.
+filesystem or device file, a search would probably be performed during the open
+call, and the key released upon close. How to deal with conflicting keys due to
+two different users opening the same file is left to the filesystem author to
+solve.
 
-When accessing a key's payload data, key->lock should be at least read locked,
-or else the data may be changed by an update being performed from userspace
-whilst the driver or filesystem is trying to access it. If no update method is
-supplied, then the key's payload may be accessed without holding a lock as
-there is no way to change it, provided it can be guaranteed that the key's
-type definition won't go away.
+When accessing a key's payload contents, certain precautions must be taken to
+prevent access vs modification races. See the section "Notes on accessing
+payload contents" for more information.
 
 (*) To search for a key, call:
 
@@ -629,6 +657,9 @@ type definition won't go away.
     Should the function fail error ENOKEY, EKEYEXPIRED or EKEYREVOKED will be
     returned.
 
+    If successful, the key will have been attached to the default keyring for
+    implicitly obtained request-key keys, as set by KEYCTL_SET_REQKEY_KEYRING.
+
 
 (*) When it is no longer required, the key should be released using:
 
@@ -690,6 +721,54 @@ type definition won't go away.
 	void unregister_key_type(struct key_type *type);
 
 
+===================================
+NOTES ON ACCESSING PAYLOAD CONTENTS
+===================================
+
+The simplest payload is just a number in key->payload.value. In this case,
+there's no need to indulge in RCU or locking when accessing the payload.
+
+More complex payload contents must be allocated and a pointer to them set in
+key->payload.data. One of the following ways must be selected to access the
+data:
+
+ (1) Unmodifyable key type.
+
+     If the key type does not have a modify method, then the key's payload can
+     be accessed without any form of locking, provided that it's known to be
+     instantiated (uninstantiated keys cannot be "found").
+
+ (2) The key's semaphore.
+
+     The semaphore could be used to govern access to the payload and to control
+     the payload pointer. It must be write-locked for modifications and would
+     have to be read-locked for general access. The disadvantage of doing this
+     is that the accessor may be required to sleep.
+
+ (3) RCU.
+
+     RCU must be used when the semaphore isn't already held; if the semaphore
+     is held then the contents can't change under you unexpectedly as the
+     semaphore must still be used to serialise modifications to the key. The
+     key management code takes care of this for the key type.
+
+     However, this means using:
+
+	rcu_read_lock() ... rcu_dereference() ... rcu_read_unlock()
+
+     to read the pointer, and:
+
+	rcu_dereference() ... rcu_assign_pointer() ... call_rcu()
+
+     to set the pointer and dispose of the old contents after a grace period.
+     Note that only the key type should ever modify a key's payload.
+
+     Furthermore, an RCU controlled payload must hold a struct rcu_head for the
+     use of call_rcu() and, if the payload is of variable size, the length of
+     the payload. key->datalen cannot be relied upon to be consistent with the
+     payload just dereferenced if the key's semaphore is not held.
+
+
 ===================
 DEFINING A KEY TYPE
 ===================
@@ -717,15 +796,15 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory:
 
 	int key_payload_reserve(struct key *key, size_t datalen);
 
-     With the revised data length. Error EDQUOT will be returned if this is
-     not viable.
+     With the revised data length. Error EDQUOT will be returned if this is not
+     viable.
 
 
  (*) int (*instantiate)(struct key *key, const void *data, size_t datalen);
 
      This method is called to attach a payload to a key during construction.
-     The payload attached need not bear any relation to the data passed to
-     this function.
+     The payload attached need not bear any relation to the data passed to this
+     function.
 
      If the amount of data attached to the key differs from the size in
      keytype->def_datalen, then key_payload_reserve() should be called.
@@ -734,38 +813,47 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory:
      The fact that KEY_FLAG_INSTANTIATED is not set in key->flags prevents
      anything else from gaining access to the key.
 
-     This method may sleep if it wishes.
+     It is safe to sleep in this method.
 
 
  (*) int (*duplicate)(struct key *key, const struct key *source);
 
      If this type of key can be duplicated, then this method should be
-     provided. It is called to copy the payload attached to the source into
-     the new key. The data length on the new key will have been updated and
-     the quota adjusted already.
+     provided. It is called to copy the payload attached to the source into the
+     new key. The data length on the new key will have been updated and the
+     quota adjusted already.
 
      This method will be called with the source key's semaphore read-locked to
-     prevent its payload from being changed. It is safe to sleep here.
+     prevent its payload from being changed, thus RCU constraints need not be
+     applied to the source key.
+
+     This method does not have to lock the destination key in order to attach a
+     payload. The fact that KEY_FLAG_INSTANTIATED is not set in key->flags
+     prevents anything else from gaining access to the key.
+
+     It is safe to sleep in this method.
 
 
  (*) int (*update)(struct key *key, const void *data, size_t datalen);
 
-     If this type of key can be updated, then this method should be
-     provided. It is called to update a key's payload from the blob of data
-     provided.
+     If this type of key can be updated, then this method should be provided.
+     It is called to update a key's payload from the blob of data provided.
 
      key_payload_reserve() should be called if the data length might change
-     before any changes are actually made. Note that if this succeeds, the
-     type is committed to changing the key because it's already been altered,
-     so all memory allocation must be done first.
+     before any changes are actually made. Note that if this succeeds, the type
+     is committed to changing the key because it's already been altered, so all
+     memory allocation must be done first.
 
-     key_payload_reserve() should be called with the key->lock write locked,
-     and the changes to the key's attached payload should be made before the
-     key is locked.
+     The key will have its semaphore write-locked before this method is called,
+     but this only deters other writers; any changes to the key's payload must
+     be made under RCU conditions, and call_rcu() must be used to dispose of
+     the old payload.
 
-     The key will have its semaphore write-locked before this method is
-     called. Any changes to the key should be made with the key's rwlock
-     write-locked also. It is safe to sleep here.
+     key_payload_reserve() should be called before the changes are made, but
+     after all allocations and other potentially failing function calls are
+     made.
+
+     It is safe to sleep in this method.
 
 
  (*) int (*match)(const struct key *key, const void *desc);
@@ -782,12 +870,12 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory:
 
  (*) void (*destroy)(struct key *key);
 
-     This method is optional. It is called to discard the payload data on a
-     key when it is being destroyed.
+     This method is optional. It is called to discard the payload data on a key
+     when it is being destroyed.
 
-     This method does not need to lock the key; it can consider the key as
-     being inaccessible. Note that the key's type may have changed before this
-     function is called.
+     This method does not need to lock the key to access the payload; it can
+     consider the key as being inaccessible at this time. Note that the key's
+     type may have been changed before this function is called.
 
      It is not safe to sleep in this method; the caller may hold spinlocks.
 
@@ -797,26 +885,31 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory:
      This method is optional. It is called during /proc/keys reading to
      summarise a key's description and payload in text form.
 
-     This method will be called with the key's rwlock read-locked. This will
-     prevent the key's payload and state changing; also the description should
-     not change. This also means it is not safe to sleep in this method.
+     This method will be called with the RCU read lock held. rcu_dereference()
+     should be used to read the payload pointer if the payload is to be
+     accessed. key->datalen cannot be trusted to stay consistent with the
+     contents of the payload.
+
+     The description will not change, though the key's state may.
+
+     It is not safe to sleep in this method; the RCU read lock is held by the
+     caller.
 
 
  (*) long (*read)(const struct key *key, char __user *buffer, size_t buflen);
 
      This method is optional. It is called by KEYCTL_READ to translate the
-     key's payload into something a blob of data for userspace to deal
-     with. Ideally, the blob should be in the same format as that passed in to
-     the instantiate and update methods.
+     key's payload into something a blob of data for userspace to deal with.
+     Ideally, the blob should be in the same format as that passed in to the
+     instantiate and update methods.
 
      If successful, the blob size that could be produced should be returned
      rather than the size copied.
 
-     This method will be called with the key's semaphore read-locked. This
-     will prevent the key's payload changing. It is not necessary to also
-     read-lock key->lock when accessing the key's payload. It is safe to sleep
-     in this method, such as might happen when the userspace buffer is
-     accessed.
+     This method will be called with the key's semaphore read-locked. This will
+     prevent the key's payload changing. It is not necessary to use RCU locking
+     when accessing the key's payload. It is safe to sleep in this method, such
+     as might happen when the userspace buffer is accessed.
 
 
 ============================
@@ -853,8 +946,8 @@ If it returns with the key remaining in the unconstructed state, the key will
 be marked as being negative, it will be added to the session keyring, and an
 error will be returned to the key requestor.
 
-Supplementary information may be provided from whoever or whatever invoked
-this service. This will be passed as the <callout_info> parameter. If no such
+Supplementary information may be provided from whoever or whatever invoked this
+service. This will be passed as the <callout_info> parameter. If no such
 information was made available, then "-" will be passed as this parameter
 instead.
 

Documentation/kprobes.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,588 @@
+Title	: Kernel Probes (Kprobes)
+Authors	: Jim Keniston <jkenisto@us.ibm.com>
+	: Prasanna S Panchamukhi <prasanna@in.ibm.com>
+
+CONTENTS
+
+1. Concepts: Kprobes, Jprobes, Return Probes
+2. Architectures Supported
+3. Configuring Kprobes
+4. API Reference
+5. Kprobes Features and Limitations
+6. Probe Overhead
+7. TODO
+8. Kprobes Example
+9. Jprobes Example
+10. Kretprobes Example
+
+1. Concepts: Kprobes, Jprobes, Return Probes
+
+Kprobes enables you to dynamically break into any kernel routine and
+collect debugging and performance information non-disruptively. You
+can trap at almost any kernel code address, specifying a handler
+routine to be invoked when the breakpoint is hit.
+
+There are currently three types of probes: kprobes, jprobes, and
+kretprobes (also called return probes).  A kprobe can be inserted
+on virtually any instruction in the kernel.  A jprobe is inserted at
+the entry to a kernel function, and provides convenient access to the
+function's arguments.  A return probe fires when a specified function
+returns.
+
+In the typical case, Kprobes-based instrumentation is packaged as
+a kernel module.  The module's init function installs ("registers")
+one or more probes, and the exit function unregisters them.  A
+registration function such as register_kprobe() specifies where
+the probe is to be inserted and what handler is to be called when
+the probe is hit.
+
+The next three subsections explain how the different types of
+probes work.  They explain certain things that you'll need to
+know in order to make the best use of Kprobes -- e.g., the
+difference between a pre_handler and a post_handler, and how
+to use the maxactive and nmissed fields of a kretprobe.  But
+if you're in a hurry to start using Kprobes, you can skip ahead
+to section 2.
+
+1.1 How Does a Kprobe Work?
+
+When a kprobe is registered, Kprobes makes a copy of the probed
+instruction and replaces the first byte(s) of the probed instruction
+with a breakpoint instruction (e.g., int3 on i386 and x86_64).
+
+When a CPU hits the breakpoint instruction, a trap occurs, the CPU's
+registers are saved, and control passes to Kprobes via the
+notifier_call_chain mechanism.  Kprobes executes the "pre_handler"
+associated with the kprobe, passing the handler the addresses of the
+kprobe struct and the saved registers.
+
+Next, Kprobes single-steps its copy of the probed instruction.
+(It would be simpler to single-step the actual instruction in place,
+but then Kprobes would have to temporarily remove the breakpoint
+instruction.  This would open a small time window when another CPU
+could sail right past the probepoint.)
+
+After the instruction is single-stepped, Kprobes executes the
+"post_handler," if any, that is associated with the kprobe.
+Execution then continues with the instruction following the probepoint.
+
+1.2 How Does a Jprobe Work?
+
+A jprobe is implemented using a kprobe that is placed on a function's
+entry point.  It employs a simple mirroring principle to allow
+seamless access to the probed function's arguments.  The jprobe
+handler routine should have the same signature (arg list and return
+type) as the function being probed, and must always end by calling
+the Kprobes function jprobe_return().
+
+Here's how it works.  When the probe is hit, Kprobes makes a copy of
+the saved registers and a generous portion of the stack (see below).
+Kprobes then points the saved instruction pointer at the jprobe's
+handler routine, and returns from the trap.  As a result, control
+passes to the handler, which is presented with the same register and
+stack contents as the probed function.  When it is done, the handler
+calls jprobe_return(), which traps again to restore the original stack
+contents and processor state and switch to the probed function.
+
+By convention, the callee owns its arguments, so gcc may produce code
+that unexpectedly modifies that portion of the stack.  This is why
+Kprobes saves a copy of the stack and restores it after the jprobe
+handler has run.  Up to MAX_STACK_SIZE bytes are copied -- e.g.,
+64 bytes on i386.
+
+Note that the probed function's args may be passed on the stack
+or in registers (e.g., for x86_64 or for an i386 fastcall function).
+The jprobe will work in either case, so long as the handler's
+prototype matches that of the probed function.
+
+1.3 How Does a Return Probe Work?
+
+When you call register_kretprobe(), Kprobes establishes a kprobe at
+the entry to the function.  When the probed function is called and this
+probe is hit, Kprobes saves a copy of the return address, and replaces
+the return address with the address of a "trampoline."  The trampoline
+is an arbitrary piece of code -- typically just a nop instruction.
+At boot time, Kprobes registers a kprobe at the trampoline.
+
+When the probed function executes its return instruction, control
+passes to the trampoline and that probe is hit.  Kprobes' trampoline
+handler calls the user-specified handler associated with the kretprobe,
+then sets the saved instruction pointer to the saved return address,
+and that's where execution resumes upon return from the trap.
+
+While the probed function is executing, its return address is
+stored in an object of type kretprobe_instance.  Before calling
+register_kretprobe(), the user sets the maxactive field of the
+kretprobe struct to specify how many instances of the specified
+function can be probed simultaneously.  register_kretprobe()
+pre-allocates the indicated number of kretprobe_instance objects.
+
+For example, if the function is non-recursive and is called with a
+spinlock held, maxactive = 1 should be enough.  If the function is
+non-recursive and can never relinquish the CPU (e.g., via a semaphore
+or preemption), NR_CPUS should be enough.  If maxactive <= 0, it is
+set to a default value.  If CONFIG_PREEMPT is enabled, the default
+is max(10, 2*NR_CPUS).  Otherwise, the default is NR_CPUS.
+
+It's not a disaster if you set maxactive too low; you'll just miss
+some probes.  In the kretprobe struct, the nmissed field is set to
+zero when the return probe is registered, and is incremented every
+time the probed function is entered but there is no kretprobe_instance
+object available for establishing the return probe.
+
+2. Architectures Supported
+
+Kprobes, jprobes, and return probes are implemented on the following
+architectures:
+
+- i386
+- x86_64 (AMD-64, E64MT)
+- ppc64
+- ia64 (Support for probes on certain instruction types is still in progress.)
+- sparc64 (Return probes not yet implemented.)
+
+3. Configuring Kprobes
+
+When configuring the kernel using make menuconfig/xconfig/oldconfig,
+ensure that CONFIG_KPROBES is set to "y".  Under "Kernel hacking",
+look for "Kprobes".  You may have to enable "Kernel debugging"
+(CONFIG_DEBUG_KERNEL) before you can enable Kprobes.
+
+You may also want to ensure that CONFIG_KALLSYMS and perhaps even
+CONFIG_KALLSYMS_ALL are set to "y", since kallsyms_lookup_name()
+is a handy, version-independent way to find a function's address.
+
+If you need to insert a probe in the middle of a function, you may find
+it useful to "Compile the kernel with debug info" (CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO),
+so you can use "objdump -d -l vmlinux" to see the source-to-object
+code mapping.
+
+4. API Reference
+
+The Kprobes API includes a "register" function and an "unregister"
+function for each type of probe.  Here are terse, mini-man-page
+specifications for these functions and the associated probe handlers
+that you'll write.  See the latter half of this document for examples.
+
+4.1 register_kprobe
+
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+int register_kprobe(struct kprobe *kp);
+
+Sets a breakpoint at the address kp->addr.  When the breakpoint is
+hit, Kprobes calls kp->pre_handler.  After the probed instruction
+is single-stepped, Kprobe calls kp->post_handler.  If a fault
+occurs during execution of kp->pre_handler or kp->post_handler,
+or during single-stepping of the probed instruction, Kprobes calls
+kp->fault_handler.  Any or all handlers can be NULL.
+
+register_kprobe() returns 0 on success, or a negative errno otherwise.
+
+User's pre-handler (kp->pre_handler):
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+#include <linux/ptrace.h>
+int pre_handler(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs);
+
+Called with p pointing to the kprobe associated with the breakpoint,
+and regs pointing to the struct containing the registers saved when
+the breakpoint was hit.  Return 0 here unless you're a Kprobes geek.
+
+User's post-handler (kp->post_handler):
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+#include <linux/ptrace.h>
+void post_handler(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs,
+	unsigned long flags);
+
+p and regs are as described for the pre_handler.  flags always seems
+to be zero.
+
+User's fault-handler (kp->fault_handler):
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+#include <linux/ptrace.h>
+int fault_handler(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs, int trapnr);
+
+p and regs are as described for the pre_handler.  trapnr is the
+architecture-specific trap number associated with the fault (e.g.,
+on i386, 13 for a general protection fault or 14 for a page fault).
+Returns 1 if it successfully handled the exception.
+
+4.2 register_jprobe
+
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+int register_jprobe(struct jprobe *jp)
+
+Sets a breakpoint at the address jp->kp.addr, which must be the address
+of the first instruction of a function.  When the breakpoint is hit,
+Kprobes runs the handler whose address is jp->entry.
+
+The handler should have the same arg list and return type as the probed
+function; and just before it returns, it must call jprobe_return().
+(The handler never actually returns, since jprobe_return() returns
+control to Kprobes.)  If the probed function is declared asmlinkage,
+fastcall, or anything else that affects how args are passed, the
+handler's declaration must match.
+
+register_jprobe() returns 0 on success, or a negative errno otherwise.
+
+4.3 register_kretprobe
+
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+int register_kretprobe(struct kretprobe *rp);
+
+Establishes a return probe for the function whose address is
+rp->kp.addr.  When that function returns, Kprobes calls rp->handler.
+You must set rp->maxactive appropriately before you call
+register_kretprobe(); see "How Does a Return Probe Work?" for details.
+
+register_kretprobe() returns 0 on success, or a negative errno
+otherwise.
+
+User's return-probe handler (rp->handler):
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+#include <linux/ptrace.h>
+int kretprobe_handler(struct kretprobe_instance *ri, struct pt_regs *regs);
+
+regs is as described for kprobe.pre_handler.  ri points to the
+kretprobe_instance object, of which the following fields may be
+of interest:
+- ret_addr: the return address
+- rp: points to the corresponding kretprobe object
+- task: points to the corresponding task struct
+The handler's return value is currently ignored.
+
+4.4 unregister_*probe
+
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+void unregister_kprobe(struct kprobe *kp);
+void unregister_jprobe(struct jprobe *jp);
+void unregister_kretprobe(struct kretprobe *rp);
+
+Removes the specified probe.  The unregister function can be called
+at any time after the probe has been registered.
+
+5. Kprobes Features and Limitations
+
+As of Linux v2.6.12, Kprobes allows multiple probes at the same
+address.  Currently, however, there cannot be multiple jprobes on
+the same function at the same time.
+
+In general, you can install a probe anywhere in the kernel.
+In particular, you can probe interrupt handlers.  Known exceptions
+are discussed in this section.
+
+For obvious reasons, it's a bad idea to install a probe in
+the code that implements Kprobes (mostly kernel/kprobes.c and
+arch/*/kernel/kprobes.c).  A patch in the v2.6.13 timeframe instructs
+Kprobes to reject such requests.
+
+If you install a probe in an inline-able function, Kprobes makes
+no attempt to chase down all inline instances of the function and
+install probes there.  gcc may inline a function without being asked,
+so keep this in mind if you're not seeing the probe hits you expect.
+
+A probe handler can modify the environment of the probed function
+-- e.g., by modifying kernel data structures, or by modifying the
+contents of the pt_regs struct (which are restored to the registers
+upon return from the breakpoint).  So Kprobes can be used, for example,
+to install a bug fix or to inject faults for testing.  Kprobes, of
+course, has no way to distinguish the deliberately injected faults
+from the accidental ones.  Don't drink and probe.
+
+Kprobes makes no attempt to prevent probe handlers from stepping on
+each other -- e.g., probing printk() and then calling printk() from a
+probe handler.  As of Linux v2.6.12, if a probe handler hits a probe,
+that second probe's handlers won't be run in that instance.
+
+In Linux v2.6.12 and previous versions, Kprobes' data structures are
+protected by a single lock that is held during probe registration and
+unregistration and while handlers are run.  Thus, no two handlers
+can run simultaneously.  To improve scalability on SMP systems,
+this restriction will probably be removed soon, in which case
+multiple handlers (or multiple instances of the same handler) may
+run concurrently on different CPUs.  Code your handlers accordingly.
+
+Kprobes does not use semaphores or allocate memory except during
+registration and unregistration.
+
+Probe handlers are run with preemption disabled.  Depending on the
+architecture, handlers may also run with interrupts disabled.  In any
+case, your handler should not yield the CPU (e.g., by attempting to
+acquire a semaphore).
+
+Since a return probe is implemented by replacing the return
+address with the trampoline's address, stack backtraces and calls
+to __builtin_return_address() will typically yield the trampoline's
+address instead of the real return address for kretprobed functions.
+(As far as we can tell, __builtin_return_address() is used only
+for instrumentation and error reporting.)
+
+If the number of times a function is called does not match the
+number of times it returns, registering a return probe on that
+function may produce undesirable results.  We have the do_exit()
+and do_execve() cases covered.  do_fork() is not an issue.  We're
+unaware of other specific cases where this could be a problem.
+
+6. Probe Overhead
+
+On a typical CPU in use in 2005, a kprobe hit takes 0.5 to 1.0
+microseconds to process.  Specifically, a benchmark that hits the same
+probepoint repeatedly, firing a simple handler each time, reports 1-2
+million hits per second, depending on the architecture.  A jprobe or
+return-probe hit typically takes 50-75% longer than a kprobe hit.
+When you have a return probe set on a function, adding a kprobe at
+the entry to that function adds essentially no overhead.
+
+Here are sample overhead figures (in usec) for different architectures.
+k = kprobe; j = jprobe; r = return probe; kr = kprobe + return probe
+on same function; jr = jprobe + return probe on same function
+
+i386: Intel Pentium M, 1495 MHz, 2957.31 bogomips
+k = 0.57 usec; j = 1.00; r = 0.92; kr = 0.99; jr = 1.40
+
+x86_64: AMD Opteron 246, 1994 MHz, 3971.48 bogomips
+k = 0.49 usec; j = 0.76; r = 0.80; kr = 0.82; jr = 1.07
+
+ppc64: POWER5 (gr), 1656 MHz (SMT disabled, 1 virtual CPU per physical CPU)
+k = 0.77 usec; j = 1.31; r = 1.26; kr = 1.45; jr = 1.99
+
+7. TODO
+
+a. SystemTap (http://sourceware.org/systemtap): Work in progress
+to provide a simplified programming interface for probe-based
+instrumentation.
+b. Improved SMP scalability: Currently, work is in progress to handle
+multiple kprobes in parallel.
+c. Kernel return probes for sparc64.
+d. Support for other architectures.
+e. User-space probes.
+
+8. Kprobes Example
+
+Here's a sample kernel module showing the use of kprobes to dump a
+stack trace and selected i386 registers when do_fork() is called.
+----- cut here -----
+/*kprobe_example.c*/
+#include <linux/kernel.h>
+#include <linux/module.h>
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+#include <linux/kallsyms.h>
+#include <linux/sched.h>
+
+/*For each probe you need to allocate a kprobe structure*/
+static struct kprobe kp;
+
+/*kprobe pre_handler: called just before the probed instruction is executed*/
+int handler_pre(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs)
+{
+	printk("pre_handler: p->addr=0x%p, eip=%lx, eflags=0x%lx\n",
+		p->addr, regs->eip, regs->eflags);
+	dump_stack();
+	return 0;
+}
+
+/*kprobe post_handler: called after the probed instruction is executed*/
+void handler_post(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs, unsigned long flags)
+{
+	printk("post_handler: p->addr=0x%p, eflags=0x%lx\n",
+		p->addr, regs->eflags);
+}
+
+/* fault_handler: this is called if an exception is generated for any
+ * instruction within the pre- or post-handler, or when Kprobes
+ * single-steps the probed instruction.
+ */
+int handler_fault(struct kprobe *p, struct pt_regs *regs, int trapnr)
+{
+	printk("fault_handler: p->addr=0x%p, trap #%dn",
+		p->addr, trapnr);
+	/* Return 0 because we don't handle the fault. */
+	return 0;
+}
+
+int init_module(void)
+{
+	int ret;
+	kp.pre_handler = handler_pre;
+	kp.post_handler = handler_post;
+	kp.fault_handler = handler_fault;
+	kp.addr = (kprobe_opcode_t*) kallsyms_lookup_name("do_fork");
+	/* register the kprobe now */
+	if (!kp.addr) {
+		printk("Couldn't find %s to plant kprobe\n", "do_fork");
+		return -1;
+	}
+	if ((ret = register_kprobe(&kp) < 0)) {
+		printk("register_kprobe failed, returned %d\n", ret);
+		return -1;
+	}
+	printk("kprobe registered\n");
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void cleanup_module(void)
+{
+	unregister_kprobe(&kp);
+	printk("kprobe unregistered\n");
+}
+
+MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
+----- cut here -----
+
+You can build the kernel module, kprobe-example.ko, using the following
+Makefile:
+----- cut here -----
+obj-m := kprobe-example.o
+KDIR := /lib/modules/$(shell uname -r)/build
+PWD := $(shell pwd)
+default:
+	$(MAKE) -C $(KDIR) SUBDIRS=$(PWD) modules
+clean:
+	rm -f *.mod.c *.ko *.o
+----- cut here -----
+
+$ make
+$ su -
+...
+# insmod kprobe-example.ko
+
+You will see the trace data in /var/log/messages and on the console
+whenever do_fork() is invoked to create a new process.
+
+9. Jprobes Example
+
+Here's a sample kernel module showing the use of jprobes to dump
+the arguments of do_fork().
+----- cut here -----
+/*jprobe-example.c */
+#include <linux/kernel.h>
+#include <linux/module.h>
+#include <linux/fs.h>
+#include <linux/uio.h>
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+#include <linux/kallsyms.h>
+
+/*
+ * Jumper probe for do_fork.
+ * Mirror principle enables access to arguments of the probed routine
+ * from the probe handler.
+ */
+
+/* Proxy routine having the same arguments as actual do_fork() routine */
+long jdo_fork(unsigned long clone_flags, unsigned long stack_start,
+	      struct pt_regs *regs, unsigned long stack_size,
+	      int __user * parent_tidptr, int __user * child_tidptr)
+{
+	printk("jprobe: clone_flags=0x%lx, stack_size=0x%lx, regs=0x%p\n",
+	       clone_flags, stack_size, regs);
+	/* Always end with a call to jprobe_return(). */
+	jprobe_return();
+	/*NOTREACHED*/
+	return 0;
+}
+
+static struct jprobe my_jprobe = {
+	.entry = (kprobe_opcode_t *) jdo_fork
+};
+
+int init_module(void)
+{
+	int ret;
+	my_jprobe.kp.addr = (kprobe_opcode_t *) kallsyms_lookup_name("do_fork");
+	if (!my_jprobe.kp.addr) {
+		printk("Couldn't find %s to plant jprobe\n", "do_fork");
+		return -1;
+	}
+
+	if ((ret = register_jprobe(&my_jprobe)) <0) {
+		printk("register_jprobe failed, returned %d\n", ret);
+		return -1;
+	}
+	printk("Planted jprobe at %p, handler addr %p\n",
+	       my_jprobe.kp.addr, my_jprobe.entry);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void cleanup_module(void)
+{
+	unregister_jprobe(&my_jprobe);
+	printk("jprobe unregistered\n");
+}
+
+MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
+----- cut here -----
+
+Build and insert the kernel module as shown in the above kprobe
+example.  You will see the trace data in /var/log/messages and on
+the console whenever do_fork() is invoked to create a new process.
+(Some messages may be suppressed if syslogd is configured to
+eliminate duplicate messages.)
+
+10. Kretprobes Example
+
+Here's a sample kernel module showing the use of return probes to
+report failed calls to sys_open().
+----- cut here -----
+/*kretprobe-example.c*/
+#include <linux/kernel.h>
+#include <linux/module.h>
+#include <linux/kprobes.h>
+#include <linux/kallsyms.h>
+
+static const char *probed_func = "sys_open";
+
+/* Return-probe handler: If the probed function fails, log the return value. */
+static int ret_handler(struct kretprobe_instance *ri, struct pt_regs *regs)
+{
+	// Substitute the appropriate register name for your architecture --
+	// e.g., regs->rax for x86_64, regs->gpr[3] for ppc64.
+	int retval = (int) regs->eax;
+	if (retval < 0) {
+		printk("%s returns %d\n", probed_func, retval);
+	}
+	return 0;
+}
+
+static struct kretprobe my_kretprobe = {
+	.handler = ret_handler,
+	/* Probe up to 20 instances concurrently. */
+	.maxactive = 20
+};
+
+int init_module(void)
+{
+	int ret;
+	my_kretprobe.kp.addr =
+		(kprobe_opcode_t *) kallsyms_lookup_name(probed_func);
+	if (!my_kretprobe.kp.addr) {
+		printk("Couldn't find %s to plant return probe\n", probed_func);
+		return -1;
+	}
+	if ((ret = register_kretprobe(&my_kretprobe)) < 0) {
+		printk("register_kretprobe failed, returned %d\n", ret);
+		return -1;
+	}
+	printk("Planted return probe at %p\n", my_kretprobe.kp.addr);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void cleanup_module(void)
+{
+	unregister_kretprobe(&my_kretprobe);
+	printk("kretprobe unregistered\n");
+	/* nmissed > 0 suggests that maxactive was set too low. */
+	printk("Missed probing %d instances of %s\n",
+		my_kretprobe.nmissed, probed_func);
+}
+
+MODULE_LICENSE("GPL");
+----- cut here -----
+
+Build and insert the kernel module as shown in the above kprobe
+example.  You will see the trace data in /var/log/messages and on the
+console whenever sys_open() returns a negative value.  (Some messages
+may be suppressed if syslogd is configured to eliminate duplicate
+messages.)
+
+For additional information on Kprobes, refer to the following URLs:
+http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/library/l-kprobes.html?ca=dgr-lnxw42Kprobe
+http://www.redhat.com/magazine/005mar05/features/kprobes/

Documentation/networking/00-INDEX

@@ -114,9 +114,7 @@ tuntap.txt
 vortex.txt
 	- info on using 3Com Vortex (3c590, 3c592, 3c595, 3c597) Ethernet cards.
 wan-router.txt
-	- Wan router documentation
-wanpipe.txt
-	- WANPIPE(tm) Multiprotocol WAN Driver for Linux WAN Router
+	- WAN router documentation
 wavelan.txt
 	- AT&T GIS (nee NCR) WaveLAN card: An Ethernet-like radio transceiver
 x25.txt

Documentation/networking/dmfe.txt

@@ -1,59 +1,65 @@
-  dmfe.c: Version 1.28        01/18/2000
+Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux.
 
-        A Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux. 
-        Copyright (C) 1997  Sten Wang
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General   Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
 
-        This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
-        modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
-        as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
-        of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-
-        This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-        but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-        MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-        GNU General Public License for more details.
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
 
 
-  A. Compiler command:
+This driver provides kernel support for Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 ethernet cards ( CNET
+10/100 ethernet cards uses Davicom chipset too, so this driver supports CNET cards too ).If you
+didn't compile this driver as a module, it will automatically load itself on boot and print a
+line similar to :
 
-     A-1: For normal single or multiple processor kernel
-          "gcc -DMODULE -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet -Wall 
-            -Wstrict-prototypes -O6 -c dmfe.c"
+	dmfe: Davicom DM9xxx net driver, version 1.36.4 (2002-01-17)
 
-     A-2: For single or multiple processor with kernel module version function
-          "gcc -DMODULE -DMODVERSIONS -D__KERNEL__ -I/usr/src/linux/net/inet 
-            -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O6 -c dmfe.c"
+If you compiled this driver as a module, you have to load it on boot.You can load it with command :
+
+	insmod dmfe
+
+This way it will autodetect the device mode.This is the suggested way to load the module.Or you can pass
+a mode= setting to module while loading, like :
+
+	insmod dmfe mode=0 # Force 10M Half Duplex
+	insmod dmfe mode=1 # Force 100M Half Duplex
+	insmod dmfe mode=4 # Force 10M Full Duplex
+	insmod dmfe mode=5 # Force 100M Full Duplex
+
+Next you should configure your network interface with a command similar to :
+
+	ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18
+                      ^^^^^^^^^^^
+		     Your IP Adress
+
+Then you may have to modify the default routing table with command :
+
+	route add default eth0
 
 
-  B. The following steps teach you how to activate a DM9102 board:
-
-        1. Used the upper compiler command to compile dmfe.c
-
-        2. Insert dmfe module into kernel
-           "insmod dmfe"        ;;Auto Detection Mode (Suggest)
-           "insmod dmfe mode=0" ;;Force 10M Half Duplex
-           "insmod dmfe mode=1" ;;Force 100M Half Duplex
-           "insmod dmfe mode=4" ;;Force 10M Full Duplex
-           "insmod dmfe mode=5" ;;Force 100M Full Duplex
-
-        3. Config a dm9102 network interface
-           "ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18"
-                          ^^^^^^^^^^^ Your IP address
-
-        4. Activate the IP routing table. For some distributions, it is not
-           necessary. You can type "route" to check.
-
-           "route add default eth0"
+Now your ethernet card should be up and running.
 
 
-        5. Well done. Your DM9102 adapter is now activated.
+TODO:
+
+Implement pci_driver::suspend() and pci_driver::resume() power management methods.
+Check on 64 bit boxes.
+Check and fix on big endian boxes.
+Test and make sure PCI latency is now correct for all cases.
 
 
-   C. Object files description:
-        1. dmfe_rh61.o:       	For Redhat 6.1
+Authors:
 
-        If you can make sure your kernel version, you can rename
-        to dmfe.o and directly use it without re-compiling.
+Sten Wang <sten_wang@davicom.com.tw >   : Original Author
+Tobias Ringstrom <tori@unhappy.mine.nu> : Current Maintainer
 
+Contributors:
 
-  Author: Sten Wang, 886-3-5798797-8517, E-mail: sten_wang@davicom.com.tw
+Marcelo Tosatti <marcelo@conectiva.com.br>
+Alan Cox <alan@redhat.com>
+Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
+Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>

Documentation/networking/fib_trie.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+			LC-trie implementation notes.
+
+Node types
+----------
+leaf 
+	An end node with data. This has a copy of the relevant key, along
+	with 'hlist' with routing table entries sorted by prefix length.
+	See struct leaf and struct leaf_info.
+
+trie node or tnode
+	An internal node, holding an array of child (leaf or tnode) pointers,
+	indexed	through a subset of the key. See Level Compression.
+
+A few concepts explained
+------------------------
+Bits (tnode) 
+	The number of bits in the key segment used for indexing into the
+	child array - the "child index". See Level Compression.
+
+Pos (tnode)
+	The position (in the key) of the key segment used for indexing into
+	the child array. See Path Compression.
+
+Path Compression / skipped bits
+	Any given tnode is linked to from the child array of its parent, using
+	a segment of the key specified by the parent's "pos" and "bits" 
+	In certain cases, this tnode's own "pos" will not be immediately
+	adjacent to the parent (pos+bits), but there will be some bits
+	in the key skipped over because they represent a single path with no
+	deviations. These "skipped bits" constitute Path Compression.
+	Note that the search algorithm will simply skip over these bits when
+	searching, making it necessary to save the keys in the leaves to
+	verify that they actually do match the key we are searching for.
+
+Level Compression / child arrays
+	the trie is kept level balanced moving, under certain conditions, the
+	children of a full child (see "full_children") up one level, so that
+	instead of a pure binary tree, each internal node ("tnode") may
+	contain an arbitrarily large array of links to several children.
+	Conversely, a tnode with a mostly empty	child array (see empty_children)
+	may be "halved", having some of its children moved downwards one level,
+	in order to avoid ever-increasing child arrays.
+
+empty_children
+	the number of positions in the child array of a given tnode that are
+	NULL.
+
+full_children
+	the number of children of a given tnode that aren't path compressed.
+	(in other words, they aren't NULL or leaves and their "pos" is equal
+	to this	tnode's "pos"+"bits").
+
+	(The word "full" here is used more in the sense of "complete" than
+	as the opposite of "empty", which might be a tad confusing.)
+
+Comments
+---------
+
+We have tried to keep the structure of the code as close to fib_hash as 
+possible to allow verification and help up reviewing. 
+
+fib_find_node()
+	A good start for understanding this code. This function implements a
+	straightforward trie lookup.
+
+fib_insert_node()
+	Inserts a new leaf node in the trie. This is bit more complicated than
+	fib_find_node(). Inserting a new node means we might have to run the
+	level compression algorithm on part of the trie.
+
+trie_leaf_remove()
+	Looks up a key, deletes it and runs the level compression algorithm.
+
+trie_rebalance()
+	The key function for the dynamic trie after any change in the trie
+	it is run to optimize and reorganize. Tt will walk the trie upwards 
+	towards the root from a given tnode, doing a resize() at each step 
+	to implement level compression.
+
+resize()
+	Analyzes a tnode and optimizes the child array size by either inflating
+	or shrinking it repeatedly until it fullfills the criteria for optimal
+	level compression. This part follows the original paper pretty closely
+	and there may be some room for experimentation here.
+
+inflate()
+	Doubles the size of the child array within a tnode. Used by resize().
+
+halve()
+	Halves the size of the child array within a tnode - the inverse of
+	inflate(). Used by resize();
+
+fn_trie_insert(), fn_trie_delete(), fn_trie_select_default()
+	The route manipulation functions. Should conform pretty closely to the
+	corresponding functions in fib_hash.
+
+fn_trie_flush()
+	This walks the full trie (using nextleaf()) and searches for empty
+	leaves which have to be removed.
+
+fn_trie_dump()
+	Dumps the routing table ordered by prefix length. This is somewhat
+	slower than the corresponding fib_hash function, as we have to walk the
+	entire trie for each prefix length. In comparison, fib_hash is organized
+	as one "zone"/hash per prefix length.
+
+Locking
+-------
+
+fib_lock is used for an RW-lock in the same way that this is done in fib_hash.
+However, the functions are somewhat separated for other possible locking
+scenarios. It might conceivably be possible to run trie_rebalance via RCU
+to avoid read_lock in the fn_trie_lookup() function.
+
+Main lookup mechanism
+---------------------
+fn_trie_lookup() is the main lookup function.
+
+The lookup is in its simplest form just like fib_find_node(). We descend the
+trie, key segment by key segment, until we find a leaf. check_leaf() does
+the fib_semantic_match in the leaf's sorted prefix hlist.
+
+If we find a match, we are done.
+
+If we don't find a match, we enter prefix matching mode. The prefix length,
+starting out at the same as the key length, is reduced one step at a time,
+and we backtrack upwards through the trie trying to find a longest matching
+prefix. The goal is always to reach a leaf and get a positive result from the
+fib_semantic_match mechanism.
+
+Inside each tnode, the search for longest matching prefix consists of searching
+through the child array, chopping off (zeroing) the least significant "1" of
+the child index until we find a match or the child index consists of nothing but
+zeros.
+
+At this point we backtrack (t->stats.backtrack++) up the trie, continuing to
+chop off part of the key in order to find the longest matching prefix.
+
+At this point we will repeatedly descend subtries to look for a match, and there
+are some optimizations available that can provide us with "shortcuts" to avoid
+descending into dead ends. Look for "HL_OPTIMIZE" sections in the code.
+
+To alleviate any doubts about the correctness of the route selection process,
+a new netlink operation has been added. Look for NETLINK_FIB_LOOKUP, which
+gives userland access to fib_lookup().

Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt

@@ -1,21 +1,21 @@
 Generic HDLC layer
 Krzysztof Halasa <khc@pm.waw.pl>
-January, 2003
 
 
 Generic HDLC layer currently supports:
-- Frame Relay (ANSI, CCITT and no LMI), with ARP support (no InARP).
-  Normal (routed) and Ethernet-bridged (Ethernet device emulation)
-  interfaces can share a single PVC.
-- raw HDLC - either IP (IPv4) interface or Ethernet device emulation.
-- Cisco HDLC,
-- PPP (uses syncppp.c),
-- X.25 (uses X.25 routines).
+1. Frame Relay (ANSI, CCITT, Cisco and no LMI).
+   - Normal (routed) and Ethernet-bridged (Ethernet device emulation)
+     interfaces can share a single PVC.
+   - ARP support (no InARP support in the kernel - there is an
+     experimental InARP user-space daemon available on:
+     http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/).
+2. raw HDLC - either IP (IPv4) interface or Ethernet device emulation.
+3. Cisco HDLC.
+4. PPP (uses syncppp.c).
+5. X.25 (uses X.25 routines).
 
-There are hardware drivers for the following cards:
-- C101 by Moxa Technologies Co., Ltd.
-- RISCom/N2 by SDL Communications Inc.
-- and others, some not in the official kernel.
+Generic HDLC is a protocol driver only - it needs a low-level driver
+for your particular hardware.
 
 Ethernet device emulation (using HDLC or Frame-Relay PVC) is compatible
 with IEEE 802.1Q (VLANs) and 802.1D (Ethernet bridging).
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ with IEEE 802.1Q (VLANs) and 802.1D (Ethernet bridging).
 Make sure the hdlc.o and the hardware driver are loaded. It should
 create a number of "hdlc" (hdlc0 etc) network devices, one for each
 WAN port. You'll need the "sethdlc" utility, get it from:
-	http://hq.pm.waw.pl/hdlc/
+	http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/
 
 Compile sethdlc.c utility:
 	gcc -O2 -Wall -o sethdlc sethdlc.c
@@ -52,12 +52,12 @@ Setting interface:
 * v35 | rs232 | x21 | t1 | e1 - sets physical interface for a given port
                                 if the card has software-selectable interfaces
   loopback - activate hardware loopback (for testing only)
-* clock ext - external clock (uses DTE RX and TX clock)
-* clock int - internal clock (provides clock signal on DCE clock output)
-* clock txint - TX internal, RX external (provides TX clock on DCE output)
-* clock txfromrx - TX clock derived from RX clock (TX clock on DCE output)
-* rate - sets clock rate in bps (not required for external clock or
-                                 for txfromrx)
+* clock ext - both RX clock and TX clock external
+* clock int - both RX clock and TX clock internal
+* clock txint - RX clock external, TX clock internal
+* clock txfromrx - RX clock external, TX clock derived from RX clock
+* rate - sets clock rate in bps (for "int" or "txint" clock only)
+
 
 Setting protocol:
 
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Setting protocol:
 * x25 - sets X.25 mode
 
 * fr - Frame Relay mode
-  lmi ansi / ccitt / none - LMI (link management) type
+  lmi ansi / ccitt / cisco / none - LMI (link management) type
   dce - Frame Relay DCE (network) side LMI instead of default DTE (user).
   It has nothing to do with clocks!
   t391 - link integrity verification polling timer (in seconds) - user
@@ -119,13 +119,14 @@ or
 
 
 
-If you have a problem with N2 or C101 card, you can issue the "private"
-command to see port's packet descriptor rings (in kernel logs):
+If you have a problem with N2, C101 or PLX200SYN card, you can issue the
+"private" command to see port's packet descriptor rings (in kernel logs):
 
 	sethdlc hdlc0 private
 
-The hardware driver has to be build with CONFIG_HDLC_DEBUG_RINGS.
+The hardware driver has to be build with #define DEBUG_RINGS.
 Attaching this info to bug reports would be helpful. Anyway, let me know
 if you have problems using this.
 
-For patches and other info look at http://hq.pm.waw.pl/hdlc/
+For patches and other info look at:
+<http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/>.

Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt

@@ -304,57 +304,6 @@ tcp_low_latency - BOOLEAN
 	changed would be a Beowulf compute cluster.
 	Default: 0
 
-tcp_westwood - BOOLEAN
-        Enable TCP Westwood+ congestion control algorithm.
-	TCP Westwood+ is a sender-side only modification of the TCP Reno 
-	protocol stack that optimizes the performance of TCP congestion 
-	control. It is based on end-to-end bandwidth estimation to set 
-	congestion window and slow start threshold after a congestion 
-	episode. Using this estimation, TCP Westwood+ adaptively sets a 
-	slow start threshold and a congestion window which takes into 
-	account the bandwidth used  at the time congestion is experienced. 
-	TCP Westwood+ significantly increases fairness wrt TCP Reno in 
-	wired networks and throughput over wireless links.   
-        Default: 0
-
-tcp_vegas_cong_avoid - BOOLEAN
-	Enable TCP Vegas congestion avoidance algorithm.
-	TCP Vegas is a sender-side only change to TCP that anticipates
-	the onset of congestion by estimating the bandwidth. TCP Vegas
-	adjusts the sending rate by modifying the congestion
-	window. TCP Vegas should provide less packet loss, but it is
-	not as aggressive as TCP Reno.
-	Default:0
-
-tcp_bic - BOOLEAN
-	Enable BIC TCP congestion control algorithm.
-	BIC-TCP is a sender-side only change that ensures a linear RTT
-	fairness under large windows while offering both scalability and
-	bounded TCP-friendliness. The protocol combines two schemes
-	called additive increase and binary search increase. When the
-	congestion window is large, additive increase with a large
-	increment ensures linear RTT fairness as well as good
-	scalability. Under small congestion windows, binary search
-	increase provides TCP friendliness.
-	Default: 0
-
-tcp_bic_low_window - INTEGER
-	Sets the threshold window (in packets) where BIC TCP starts to
-	adjust the congestion window. Below this threshold BIC TCP behaves
-	the same as the default TCP Reno. 
-	Default: 14
-
-tcp_bic_fast_convergence - BOOLEAN
-	Forces BIC TCP to more quickly respond to changes in congestion
-	window. Allows two flows sharing the same connection to converge
-	more rapidly.
-	Default: 1
-
-tcp_default_win_scale - INTEGER
-	Sets the minimum window scale TCP will negotiate for on all
-	conections.
-	Default: 7
-
 tcp_tso_win_divisor - INTEGER
        This allows control over what percentage of the congestion window
        can be consumed by a single TSO frame.
@@ -368,6 +317,11 @@ tcp_frto - BOOLEAN
 	where packet loss is typically due to random radio interference
 	rather than intermediate router congestion.
 
+tcp_congestion_control - STRING
+	Set the congestion control algorithm to be used for new
+	connections. The algorithm "reno" is always available, but
+	additional choices may be available based on kernel configuration.
+
 somaxconn - INTEGER
 	Limit of socket listen() backlog, known in userspace as SOMAXCONN.
 	Defaults to 128.  See also tcp_max_syn_backlog for additional tuning

Documentation/networking/multicast.txt

@@ -47,7 +47,6 @@ ni52		<------------------ Buggy ------------------>
 ni65		YES		YES		YES		Software(#)
 seeq		NO		NO		NO		N/A
 sgiseek		<------------------ Buggy ------------------>
-sk_g16		NO		NO		YES		N/A
 smc-ultra	YES		YES		YES		Hardware
 sunlance	YES		YES		YES		Hardware
 tulip		YES		YES		YES		Hardware

Documentation/networking/net-modules.txt

@@ -284,9 +284,6 @@ ppp.c:
 seeq8005.c: *Not modularized*
 	(Probes ports: 0x300, 0x320, 0x340, 0x360)
 
-sk_g16.c: *Not modularized*
-	(Probes ports: 0x100, 0x180, 0x208, 0x220m 0x288, 0x320, 0x328, 0x390)
-
 skeleton.c: *Skeleton*
 
 slhc.c:

Documentation/networking/tcp.txt

@@ -1,5 +1,72 @@
-How the new TCP output machine [nyi] works.
+TCP protocol
+============
 
+Last updated: 21 June 2005
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Congestion control
+- How the new TCP output machine [nyi] works
+
+Congestion control
+==================
+
+The following variables are used in the tcp_sock for congestion control:
+snd_cwnd		The size of the congestion window
+snd_ssthresh		Slow start threshold. We are in slow start if
+			snd_cwnd is less than this.
+snd_cwnd_cnt		A counter used to slow down the rate of increase
+			once we exceed slow start threshold.
+snd_cwnd_clamp		This is the maximum size that snd_cwnd can grow to.
+snd_cwnd_stamp		Timestamp for when congestion window last validated.
+snd_cwnd_used		Used as a highwater mark for how much of the
+			congestion window is in use. It is used to adjust
+			snd_cwnd down when the link is limited by the
+			application rather than the network.
+
+As of 2.6.13, Linux supports pluggable congestion control algorithms.
+A congestion control mechanism can be registered through functions in
+tcp_cong.c. The functions used by the congestion control mechanism are
+registered via passing a tcp_congestion_ops struct to
+tcp_register_congestion_control. As a minimum name, ssthresh,
+cong_avoid, min_cwnd must be valid.
+
+Private data for a congestion control mechanism is stored in tp->ca_priv.
+tcp_ca(tp) returns a pointer to this space.  This is preallocated space - it
+is important to check the size of your private data will fit this space, or
+alternatively space could be allocated elsewhere and a pointer to it could
+be stored here.
+
+There are three kinds of congestion control algorithms currently: The
+simplest ones are derived from TCP reno (highspeed, scalable) and just
+provide an alternative the congestion window calculation. More complex
+ones like BIC try to look at other events to provide better
+heuristics.  There are also round trip time based algorithms like
+Vegas and Westwood+.
+
+Good TCP congestion control is a complex problem because the algorithm
+needs to maintain fairness and performance. Please review current
+research and RFC's before developing new modules.
+
+The method that is used to determine which congestion control mechanism is
+determined by the setting of the sysctl net.ipv4.tcp_congestion_control.
+The default congestion control will be the last one registered (LIFO);
+so if you built everything as modules. the default will be reno. If you
+build with the default's from Kconfig, then BIC will be builtin (not a module)
+and it will end up the default.
+
+If you really want a particular default value then you will need
+to set it with the sysctl.  If you use a sysctl, the module will be autoloaded
+if needed and you will get the expected protocol. If you ask for an
+unknown congestion method, then the sysctl attempt will fail.
+
+If you remove a tcp congestion control module, then you will get the next
+available one. Since reno can not be built as a module, and can not be
+deleted, it will always be available.
+
+How the new TCP output machine [nyi] works.
+===========================================
 
 Data is kept on a single queue. The skb->users flag tells us if the frame is
 one that has been queued already. To add a frame we throw it on the end. Ack

Documentation/networking/wanpipe.txt

@@ -1,622 +0,0 @@
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Linux WAN Router Utilities Package
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-Version 2.2.1 
-Mar 28, 2001
-Author: Nenad Corbic <ncorbic@sangoma.com>
-Copyright (c) 1995-2001 Sangoma Technologies Inc.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-INTRODUCTION
-
-Wide Area Networks (WANs) are used to interconnect Local Area Networks (LANs)
-and/or stand-alone hosts over vast distances with data transfer rates
-significantly higher than those achievable with commonly used dial-up
-connections.
-
-Usually an external device called `WAN router' sitting on your local network
-or connected to your machine's serial port provides physical connection to
-WAN.  Although router's job may be as simple as taking your local network
-traffic, converting it to WAN format and piping it through the WAN link, these
-devices are notoriously expensive, with prices as much as 2 - 5 times higher
-then the price of a typical PC box.
-
-Alternatively, considering robustness and multitasking capabilities of Linux,
-an internal router can be built (most routers use some sort of stripped down
-Unix-like operating system anyway). With a number of relatively inexpensive WAN
-interface cards available on the market, a perfectly usable router can be
-built for less than half a price of an external router.  Yet a Linux box
-acting as a router can still be used for other purposes, such as fire-walling,
-running FTP, WWW or DNS server, etc.
-
-This kernel module introduces the notion of a WAN Link Driver (WLD) to Linux
-operating system and provides generic hardware-independent services for such
-drivers.  Why can existing Linux network device interface not be used for
-this purpose?  Well, it can.  However, there are a few key differences between
-a typical network interface (e.g. Ethernet) and a WAN link.
-
-Many WAN protocols, such as X.25 and frame relay, allow for multiple logical
-connections (known as `virtual circuits' in X.25 terminology) over a single
-physical link.  Each such virtual circuit may (and almost always does) lead
-to a different geographical location and, therefore, different network.  As a
-result, it is the virtual circuit, not the physical link, that represents a
-route and, therefore, a network interface in Linux terms.
-
-To further complicate things, virtual circuits are usually volatile in nature
-(excluding so called `permanent' virtual circuits or PVCs).  With almost no
-time required to set up and tear down a virtual circuit, it is highly desirable
-to implement on-demand connections in order to minimize network charges.  So
-unlike a typical network driver, the WAN driver must be able to handle multiple
-network interfaces and cope as multiple virtual circuits come into existence
-and go away dynamically.
- 
-Last, but not least, WAN configuration is much more complex than that of say
-Ethernet and may well amount to several dozens of parameters.  Some of them
-are "link-wide"  while others are virtual circuit-specific.  The same holds
-true for WAN statistics which is by far more extensive and extremely useful
-when troubleshooting WAN connections.  Extending the ifconfig utility to suit
-these needs may be possible, but does not seem quite reasonable.  Therefore, a
-WAN configuration utility and corresponding application programmer's interface
-is needed for this purpose.
-
-Most of these problems are taken care of by this module.  Its goal is to
-provide a user with more-or-less standard look and feel for all WAN devices and
-assist a WAN device driver writer by providing common services, such as:
-
- o User-level interface via /proc file system
- o Centralized configuration
- o Device management (setup, shutdown, etc.)
- o Network interface management (dynamic creation/destruction)
- o Protocol encapsulation/decapsulation
-
-To ba able to use the Linux WAN Router you will also need a WAN Tools package
-available from
-
-	ftp.sangoma.com/pub/linux/current_wanpipe/wanpipe-X.Y.Z.tgz
-
-where vX.Y.Z represent the wanpipe version number.
-
-For technical questions and/or comments please e-mail to ncorbic@sangoma.com.
-For general inquiries please contact Sangoma Technologies Inc. by
-
-	Hotline:	1-800-388-2475	(USA and Canada, toll free)
-	Phone:		(905) 474-1990  ext: 106
-	Fax:		(905) 474-9223
-	E-mail:		dm@sangoma.com	(David Mandelstam)
-	WWW:		http://www.sangoma.com
-
-
-INSTALLATION
-
-Please read the WanpipeForLinux.pdf manual on how to 
-install the WANPIPE tools and drivers properly. 
-
-
-After installing wanpipe package: /usr/local/wanrouter/doc. 
-On the ftp.sangoma.com : /linux/current_wanpipe/doc
-
-
-COPYRIGHT AND LICENSING INFORMATION
-
-This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
-the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
-Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version.
-
-This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
-ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS
-FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
-this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass
-Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-
-
-
-ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
-
-This product is based on the WANPIPE(tm) Multiprotocol WAN Router developed
-by Sangoma Technologies Inc. for Linux 2.0.x and 2.2.x.  Success of the WANPIPE
-together with the next major release of Linux kernel in summer 1996 commanded
-adequate changes to the WANPIPE code to take full advantage of new Linux
-features.
-
-Instead of continuing developing proprietary interface tied to Sangoma WAN
-cards, we decided to separate all hardware-independent code into a separate
-module and defined two levels of interfaces - one for user-level applications
-and another for kernel-level WAN drivers.  WANPIPE is now implemented as a
-WAN driver compliant with the WAN Link Driver interface.  Also a general
-purpose WAN configuration utility and a set of shell scripts was developed to 
-support WAN router at the user level.
-
-Many useful ideas concerning hardware-independent interface implementation
-were given by Mike McLagan <mike.mclagan@linux.org> and his implementation
-of the Frame Relay router and drivers for Sangoma cards (dlci/sdla).
-
-With the new implementation of the APIs being incorporated into the WANPIPE,
-a special thank goes to Alan Cox in providing insight into BSD sockets.
-
-Special thanks to all the WANPIPE users who performed field-testing, reported
-bugs and made valuable comments and suggestions that help us to improve this
-product.
-
-
-
-NEW IN THIS RELEASE
-
-	o Updated the WANCFG utility
-		Calls the pppconfig to configure the PPPD
-		for async connections.
-
-	o Added the PPPCONFIG utility
-		Used to configure the PPPD dameon for the
-		WANPIPE Async PPP and standard serial port.
-		The wancfg calls the pppconfig to configure
-		the pppd.
-
-	o Fixed the PCI autodetect feature.  
-		The SLOT 0 was used as an autodetect option
-		however, some high end PC's slot numbers start
-		from 0. 
-
-	o This release has been tested with the new backupd
-	  daemon release.
-	
-
-PRODUCT COMPONENTS AND RELATED FILES
-
-/etc: (or user defined)
-	wanpipe1.conf	default router configuration file
-
-/lib/modules/X.Y.Z/misc:
-	wanrouter.o	router kernel loadable module
-	af_wanpipe.o	wanpipe api socket module
-
-/lib/modules/X.Y.Z/net:
-	sdladrv.o	Sangoma SDLA support module
-	wanpipe.o	Sangoma WANPIPE(tm) driver module
-
-/proc/net/wanrouter
-	Config		reads current router configuration
-	Status		reads current router status
-	{name}		reads WAN driver statistics
-
-/usr/sbin:
-	wanrouter	wanrouter start-up script
-	wanconfig	wanrouter configuration utility
-	sdladump	WANPIPE adapter memory dump utility
-        fpipemon        Monitor for Frame Relay
-        cpipemon        Monitor for Cisco HDLC
-	ppipemon 	Monitor for PPP
-	xpipemon 	Monitor for X25
-	wpkbdmon        WANPIPE keyboard led monitor/debugger
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter:
-	README		this file
-	COPYING		GNU General Public License
-	Setup		installation script
-	Filelist	distribution definition file
-	wanrouter.rc	meta-configuration file 
-			(used by the Setup and wanrouter script)
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/doc:
-	wanpipeForLinux.pdf 	WAN Router User's Manual
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/patches:
-	wanrouter-v2213.gz  	patch for Linux kernels 2.2.11 up to 2.2.13.
-	wanrouter-v2214.gz	patch for Linux kernel 2.2.14. 
-	wanrouter-v2215.gz	patch for Linux kernels 2.2.15 to 2.2.17.
-	wanrouter-v2218.gz	patch for Linux kernels 2.2.18 and up.
-	wanrouter-v240.gz	patch for Linux kernel 2.4.0.  
-	wanrouter-v242.gz	patch for Linux kernel 2.4.2 and up.
-	wanrouter-v2034.gz	patch for Linux kernel 2.0.34
-	wanrouter-v2036.gz 	patch for Linux kernel 2.0.36 and up. 
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/patches/kdrivers:
-	Sources of the latest WANPIPE device drivers.
-	These are used to UPGRADE the linux kernel to the newest
-	version if the kernel source has already been pathced with
-	WANPIPE drivers.
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/samples:
-	interface	sample interface configuration file
-	wanpipe1.cpri 	CHDLC primary port
-     	wanpipe2.csec 	CHDLC secondary port
-     	wanpipe1.fr   	Frame Relay protocol
-     	wanpipe1.ppp  	PPP protocol ) 
-	wanpipe1.asy	CHDLC ASYNC protocol
-	wanpipe1.x25	X25 protocol
-	wanpipe1.stty	Sync TTY driver (Used by Kernel PPPD daemon)
-	wanpipe1.atty	Async TTY driver (Used by Kernel PPPD daemon)
-	wanrouter.rc	sample meta-configuration file
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/util:
-	*		wan-tools utilities source code
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/api/x25:
-	*		x25 api sample programs.
-/usr/local/wanrouter/api/chdlc:
-	*		chdlc api sample programs.
-/usr/local/wanrouter/api/fr:
-	*		fr api sample programs.
-/usr/local/wanrouter/config/wancfg:
-	wancfg		WANPIPE GUI configuration program.
-                        Creates wanpipe#.conf files. 
-/usr/local/wanrouter/config/cfgft1:
-	cfgft1		GUI CSU/DSU configuration program.
-
-/usr/include/linux:
-	wanrouter.h	router API definitions
-	wanpipe.h	WANPIPE API definitions
-	sdladrv.h	SDLA support module API definitions
-	sdlasfm.h	SDLA firmware module definitions
-	if_wanpipe.h	WANPIPE Socket definitions
-	if_wanpipe_common.h	WANPIPE Socket/Driver common definitions.
-	sdlapci.h	WANPIPE PCI definitions
-	
-
-/usr/src/linux/net/wanrouter:
-	*		wanrouter source code
-
-/var/log:
-	wanrouter	wanrouter start-up log (created by the Setup script)
-
-/var/lock:  (or /var/lock/subsys for RedHat)
-	wanrouter	wanrouter lock file (created by the Setup script)
-
-/usr/local/wanrouter/firmware:
-	fr514.sfm	Frame relay firmware for Sangoma S508/S514 card
-	cdual514.sfm	Dual Port Cisco HDLC firmware for Sangoma S508/S514 card
-	ppp514.sfm      PPP Firmware for Sangoma S508 and S514 cards
-	x25_508.sfm	X25 Firmware for Sangoma S508 card.
-
-
-REVISION HISTORY
-
-1.0.0	December 31, 1996	Initial version
-
-1.0.1	January 30, 1997	Status and statistics can be read via /proc
-				filesystem entries.
-
-1.0.2   April 30, 1997          Added UDP management via monitors.
-
-1.0.3	June 3, 1997		UDP management for multiple boards using Frame
-				Relay and PPP
-				Enabled continuous transmission of Configure 
-				Request Packet for PPP (for 508 only)
-				Connection Timeout for PPP changed from 900 to 0
-				Flow Control Problem fixed for Frame Relay
-
-1.0.4	July 10, 1997		S508/FT1 monitoring capability in fpipemon and
-				ppipemon utilities.
-				Configurable TTL for UDP packets.
-				Multicast and Broadcast IP source addresses are
-				silently discarded.
-
-1.0.5	July 28, 1997		Configurable T391,T392,N391,N392,N393 for Frame
-				Relay in router.conf.
-				Configurable Memory Address through router.conf 
-				for Frame Relay, PPP and X.25. (commenting this
- 				out enables auto-detection).
-				Fixed freeing up received buffers using kfree()
- 				for Frame Relay and X.25.
-				Protect sdla_peek() by calling save_flags(),
-				cli() and restore_flags().
-				Changed number of Trace elements from 32 to 20
-				Added DLCI specific data monitoring in FPIPEMON. 
-2.0.0	Nov 07, 1997		Implemented protection of RACE conditions by 
-				critical flags for FRAME RELAY and PPP.
-				DLCI List interrupt mode implemented.
-				IPX support in FRAME RELAY and PPP.
-				IPX Server Support (MARS)
-				More driver specific stats included in FPIPEMON
-				and PIPEMON.
-
-2.0.1	Nov 28, 1997		Bug Fixes for version 2.0.0.
-				Protection of "enable_irq()" while 
-				"disable_irq()" has been enabled from any other
-				routine (for Frame Relay, PPP and X25).
-				Added additional Stats for Fpipemon and Ppipemon
-				Improved Load Sharing for multiple boards
-
-2.0.2	Dec 09, 1997		Support for PAP and CHAP for ppp has been
-				implemented.
-
-2.0.3	Aug 15, 1998		New release supporting Cisco HDLC, CIR for Frame
-				relay, Dynamic IP assignment for PPP and Inverse
-				Arp support for Frame-relay.  Man Pages are 
-				included for better support and a new utility
-				for configuring FT1 cards.
-
-2.0.4	Dec 09, 1998	        Dual Port support for Cisco HDLC.
-				Support for HDLC (LAPB) API.
-				Supports BiSync Streaming code for S502E 
-				and S503 cards.
-				Support for Streaming HDLC API.
-				Provides a BSD socket interface for 
-				creating applications using BiSync
-   				streaming.        
-
-2.0.5   Aug 04, 1999 		CHDLC initializatin bug fix.
-				PPP interrupt driven driver: 
-  				Fix to the PPP line hangup problem.
-				New PPP firmware
-				Added comments to the startup SYSTEM ERROR messages
-				Xpipemon debugging application for the X25 protocol
-				New USER_MANUAL.txt
-				Fixed the odd boundary 4byte writes to the board.
-				BiSync Streaming code has been taken out.  
-				 Available as a patch.
-				Streaming HDLC API has been taken out.  
-				 Available as a patch.                 
-
-2.0.6   Aug 17, 1999		Increased debugging in statup scripts
-				Fixed insallation bugs from 2.0.5
-				Kernel patch works for both 2.2.10 and 2.2.11 kernels.
-				There is no functional difference between the two packages         
-
-2.0.7   Aug 26, 1999		o  Merged X25API code into WANPIPE.
-				o  Fixed a memeory leak for X25API
-				o  Updated the X25API code for 2.2.X kernels.
-				o  Improved NEM handling.   
-
-2.1.0	Oct 25, 1999		o New code for S514 PCI Card
-				o New CHDLC and Frame Relay drivers
-				o PPP and X25 are not supported in this release    
-
-2.1.1	Nov 30, 1999		o PPP support for S514 PCI Cards
-
-2.1.3   Apr 06, 2000		o Socket based x25api 
-				o Socket based chdlc api
-				o Socket based fr api
-				o Dual Port Receive only CHDLC support.
-				o Asynchronous CHDLC support (Secondary Port)
-				o cfgft1 GUI csu/dsu configurator
-				o wancfg GUI configuration file 
-				  configurator.
-				o Architectual directory changes.
-
-beta-2.1.4 Jul 2000		o Dynamic interface configuration:
-					Network interfaces reflect the state
-					of protocol layer.  If the protocol becomes
-					disconnected, driver will bring down
-					the interface.  Once the protocol reconnects
-					the interface will be brought up. 
-					
-					Note: This option is turned off by default.
-
-				o Dynamic wanrouter setup using 'wanconfig':
-					wanconfig utility can be used to
-					shutdown,restart,start or reconfigure 
-					a virtual circuit dynamically.
-				     
-					Frame Relay:  Each DLCI can be: 
-						      created,stopped,restarted and reconfigured
-						      dynamically using wanconfig.
-					
-						      ex: wanconfig card wanpipe1 dev wp1_fr16 up
-				  
-				o Wanrouter startup via command line arguments:
-					wanconfig also supports wanrouter startup via command line
-					arguments.  Thus, there is no need to create a wanpipe#.conf
-					configuration file.  
-
-				o Socket based x25api update/bug fixes.
-					Added support for LCN numbers greater than 255.
-					Option to pass up modem messages.
-					Provided a PCI IRQ check, so a single S514
-					card is guaranteed to have a non-sharing interrupt.
-
-				o Fixes to the wancfg utility.
-				o New FT1 debugging support via *pipemon utilities.
-				o Frame Relay ARP support Enabled.
-
-beta3-2.1.4 Jul 2000		o X25 M_BIT Problem fix.
-				o Added the Multi-Port PPP
-				  Updated utilites for the Multi-Port PPP.
-
-2.1.4	Aut 2000
-				o In X25API:
-					Maximum packet an application can send
-					to the driver has been extended to 4096 bytes.
-
-					Fixed the x25 startup bug. Enable 
-					communications only after all interfaces
-					come up.  HIGH SVC/PVC is used to calculate
-					the number of channels.
-					Enable protocol only after all interfaces
-					are enabled.
-
-				o Added an extra state to the FT1 config, kernel module.
-				o Updated the pipemon debuggers.
-
-				o Blocked the Multi-Port PPP from running on kernels
-				  2.2.16 or greater, due to syncppp kernel module
-				  change. 
-	  
-beta1-2.1.5 	Nov 15 2000
-				o Fixed the MulitPort PPP Support for kernels 2.2.16 and above.
-				  2.2.X kernels only
-
-				o Secured the driver UDP debugging calls
-					- All illegal netowrk debugging calls are reported to
-					  the log.
-					- Defined a set of allowed commands, all other denied.
-					
-				o Cpipemon
-					- Added set FT1 commands to the cpipemon. Thus CSU/DSU
-					  configuraiton can be performed using cpipemon.
-					  All systems that cannot run cfgft1 GUI utility should
-					  use cpipemon to configure the on board CSU/DSU.
-
-
-				o Keyboard Led Monitor/Debugger
-					- A new utilty /usr/sbin/wpkbdmon uses keyboard leds
-					  to convey operatinal statistic information of the 
-					  Sangoma WANPIPE cards.
-					NUM_LOCK    = Line State  (On=connected,    Off=disconnected)
-					CAPS_LOCK   = Tx data     (On=transmitting, Off=no tx data)
-					SCROLL_LOCK = Rx data     (On=receiving,    Off=no rx data
-					
-				o Hardware probe on module load and dynamic device allocation
-					- During WANPIPE module load, all Sangoma cards are probed
-					  and found information is printed in the /var/log/messages.
-					- If no cards are found, the module load fails.
-					- Appropriate number of devices are dynamically loaded 
-					  based on the number of Sangoma cards found.
-
-					  Note: The kernel configuraiton option 
-						CONFIG_WANPIPE_CARDS has been taken out.
-					
-				o Fixed the Frame Relay and Chdlc network interfaces so they are
-				  compatible with libpcap libraries.  Meaning, tcpdump, snort,
-				  ethereal, and all other packet sniffers and debuggers work on
-				  all WANPIPE netowrk interfaces.
-					- Set the network interface encoding type to ARPHRD_PPP.
-					  This tell the sniffers that data obtained from the
-					  network interface is in pure IP format.
-				  Fix for 2.2.X kernels only.
-				
-				o True interface encoding option for Frame Relay and CHDLC
-					- The above fix sets the network interface encoding
-					  type to ARPHRD_PPP, however some customers use
-					  the encoding interface type to determine the
-					  protocol running.  Therefore, the TURE ENCODING
-					  option will set the interface type back to the
-					  original value.  
-
-					  NOTE: If this option is used with Frame Relay and CHDLC
-						libpcap library support will be broken.  
-						i.e. tcpdump will not work.
-					Fix for 2.2.x Kernels only.
-						
-				o Ethernet Bridgind over Frame Relay
-					- The Frame Relay bridging has been developed by 
-					  Kristian Hoffmann and Mark Wells.  
-					- The Linux kernel bridge is used to send ethernet 
-					  data over the frame relay links.
-					For 2.2.X Kernels only.
-
-				o Added extensive 2.0.X support. Most new features of
-				  2.1.5 for protocols Frame Relay, PPP and CHDLC are
-				  supported under 2.0.X kernels. 
-
-beta1-2.2.0 	Dec 30 2000
-				o Updated drivers for 2.4.X kernels.
-				o Updated drivers for SMP support.
-				o X25API is now able to share PCI interrupts.
-				o Took out a general polling routine that was used
-				  only by X25API. 
-				o Added appropriate locks to the dynamic reconfiguration
-				  code.
-				o Fixed a bug in the keyboard debug monitor.
-
-beta2-2.2.0	Jan 8 2001
-				o Patches for 2.4.0 kernel
-				o Patches for 2.2.18 kernel
-				o Minor updates to PPP and CHLDC drivers.
-				  Note: No functinal difference. 
-
-beta3-2.2.9	Jan 10 2001
-				o I missed the 2.2.18 kernel patches in beta2-2.2.0
-				  release.  They are included in this release.
-
-Stable Release
-2.2.0		Feb 01 2001
-				o Bug fix in wancfg GUI configurator.
-					The edit function didn't work properly.
-
-
-bata1-2.2.1	Feb 09 2001
-			o WANPIPE TTY Driver emulation. 
-			  Two modes of operation Sync and Async.
-				Sync: Using the PPPD daemon, kernel SyncPPP layer
-				      and the Wanpipe sync TTY driver: a PPP protocol 
-				      connection can be established via Sangoma adapter, over
-				      a T1 leased line.
-			
-				      The 2.4.0 kernel PPP layer supports MULTILINK
-				      protocol, that can be used to bundle any number of Sangoma
-				      adapters (T1 lines) into one, under a single IP address.
-				      Thus, efficiently obtaining multiple T1 throughput. 
-
-				      NOTE: The remote side must also implement MULTILINK PPP
-					    protocol.
-
-				Async:Using the PPPD daemon, kernel AsyncPPP layer
-				      and the WANPIPE async TTY driver: a PPP protocol
-				      connection can be established via Sangoma adapter and
-				      a modem, over a telephone line.
-
-				      Thus, the WANPIPE async TTY driver simulates a serial
-				      TTY driver that would normally be used to interface the 
-				      MODEM to the linux kernel.
-				
-			o WANPIPE PPP Backup Utility
-				This utility will monitor the state of the PPP T1 line.
-				In case of failure, a dial up connection will be established
-				via pppd daemon, ether via a serial tty driver (serial port), 
-				or a WANPIPE async TTY driver (in case serial port is unavailable).
-				
-				Furthermore, while in dial up mode, the primary PPP T1 link
-				will be monitored for signs of life.  
-
-				If the PPP T1 link comes back to life, the dial up connection
-				will be shutdown and T1 line re-established.
-			
-
-			o New Setup installation script.
-				Option to UPGRADE device drivers if the kernel source has
-				already been patched with WANPIPE.
-
-				Option to COMPILE WANPIPE modules against the currently 
-				running kernel, thus no need for manual kernel and module
-				re-compilatin.
-			
-			o Updates and Bug Fixes to wancfg utility.
-
-bata2-2.2.1	Feb 20 2001
-
-			o Bug fixes to the CHDLC device drivers.
-				The driver had compilation problems under kernels
-				2.2.14 or lower.
-
-			o Bug fixes to the Setup installation script.
-				The device drivers compilation options didn't work
-				properly.
-
-			o Update to the wpbackupd daemon.  
-				Optimized the cross-over times, between the primary
-				link and the backup dialup.
-
-beta3-2.2.1	Mar 02 2001
-			o Patches for 2.4.2 kernel.
-
-			o Bug fixes to util/ make files.
-			o Bug fixes to the Setup installation script.
-
-			o Took out the backupd support and made it into
-			  as separate package.
-			  
-beta4-2.2.1     Mar 12 2001
-
-		o Fix to the Frame Relay Device driver.
-			IPSAC sends a packet of zero length
-			header to the frame relay driver.  The
-			driver tries to push its own 2 byte header
-			into the packet, which causes the driver to
-			crash.
-
-		o Fix the WANPIPE re-configuration code.
-			Bug was found by trying to run  the cfgft1 while the
-			interface was already running.  
-
-		o Updates to cfgft1.
-			Writes a wanpipe#.cfgft1 configuration file
-			once the CSU/DSU is configured. This file can
-			holds the current CSU/DSU configuration.
-
-
-
->>>>>> END OF README <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-
-

Documentation/pci.txt

@@ -266,20 +266,6 @@ port an old driver to the new PCI interface.  They are no longer present
 in the kernel as they aren't compatible with hotplug or PCI domains or
 having sane locking.
 
-pcibios_present() and		Since ages, you don't need to test presence
-pci_present()			of PCI subsystem when trying to talk to it.
-				If it's not there, the list of PCI devices
-				is empty and all functions for searching for
-				devices just return NULL.
-pcibios_(read|write)_*		Superseded by their pci_(read|write)_*
-				counterparts.
-pcibios_find_*			Superseded by their pci_get_* counterparts.
-pci_for_each_dev()		Superseded by pci_get_device()
-pci_for_each_dev_reverse()	Superseded by pci_find_device_reverse()
-pci_for_each_bus()		Superseded by pci_find_next_bus()
 pci_find_device()		Superseded by pci_get_device()
 pci_find_subsys()		Superseded by pci_get_subsys()
 pci_find_slot()			Superseded by pci_get_slot()
-pcibios_find_class()		Superseded by pci_get_class()
-pci_find_class()		Superseded by pci_get_class()
-pci_(read|write)_*_nodev()	Superseded by pci_bus_(read|write)_*()

Documentation/pcmcia/devicetable.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+Matching of PCMCIA devices to drivers is done using one or more of the
+following criteria:
+
+- manufactor ID
+- card ID
+- product ID strings _and_ hashes of these strings
+- function ID
+- device function (actual and pseudo)
+
+You should use the helpers in include/pcmcia/device_id.h for generating the
+struct pcmcia_device_id[] entries which match devices to drivers.
+
+If you want to match product ID strings, you also need to pass the crc32
+hashes of the string to the macro, e.g. if you want to match the product ID
+string 1, you need to use
+
+PCMCIA_DEVICE_PROD_ID1("some_string", 0x(hash_of_some_string)),
+
+If the hash is incorrect, the kernel will inform you about this in "dmesg"
+upon module initialization, and tell you of the correct hash.
+
+You can determine the hash of the product ID strings by catting the file
+"modalias" in the sysfs directory of the PCMCIA device. It generates a string
+in the following form:
+pcmcia:m0149cC1ABf06pfn00fn00pa725B842DpbF1EFEE84pc0877B627pd00000000
+
+The hex value after "pa" is the hash of product ID string 1, after "pb" for
+string 2 and so on.
+
+Alternatively, you can use this small tool to determine the crc32 hash.
+simply pass the string you want to evaluate as argument to this program,
+e.g.
+$ ./crc32hash "Dual Speed"
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+/* crc32hash.c - derived from linux/lib/crc32.c, GNU GPL v2 */
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+unsigned int crc32(unsigned char const *p, unsigned int len)
+{
+	int i;
+	unsigned int crc = 0;
+	while (len--) {
+		crc ^= *p++;
+		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
+			crc = (crc >> 1) ^ ((crc & 1) ? 0xedb88320 : 0);
+	}
+	return crc;
+}
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv) {
+	unsigned int result;
+	if (argc != 2) {
+		printf("no string passed as argument\n");
+		return -1;
+	}
+	result = crc32(argv[1], strlen(argv[1]));
+	printf("0x%x\n", result);
+	return 0;
+}

Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors:
+
+* event handler initialization in struct pcmcia_driver (as of 2.6.13)
+   The event handler is notified of all events, and must be initialized
+   as the event() callback in the driver's struct pcmcia_driver.
+
+* pcmcia/version.h should not be used (as of 2.6.13)
+   This file will be removed eventually.
+
+* in-kernel device<->driver matching (as of 2.6.13)
+   PCMCIA devices and their correct drivers can now be matched in
+   kernelspace. See 'devicetable.txt' for details.
+
+* Device model integration (as of 2.6.11)
+   A struct pcmcia_device is registered with the device model core,
+   and can be used (e.g. for SET_NETDEV_DEV) by using
+   handle_to_dev(client_handle_t * handle).
+
+* Convert internal I/O port addresses to unsigned long (as of 2.6.11)
+   ioaddr_t should be replaced by kio_addr_t in PCMCIA card drivers.
+
+* irq_mask and irq_list parameters (as of 2.6.11)
+   The irq_mask and irq_list parameters should no longer be used in
+   PCMCIA card drivers. Instead, it is the job of the PCMCIA core to
+   determine which IRQ should be used. Therefore, link->irq.IRQInfo2
+   is ignored.
+
+* client->PendingEvents is gone (as of 2.6.11)
+   client->PendingEvents is no longer available.
+
+* client->Attributes are gone (as of 2.6.11)
+   client->Attributes is unused, therefore it is removed from all
+   PCMCIA card drivers
+
+* core functions no longer available (as of 2.6.11)
+   The following functions have been removed from the kernel source
+   because they are unused by all in-kernel drivers, and no external
+   driver was reported to rely on them:
+	pcmcia_get_first_region()
+	pcmcia_get_next_region()
+	pcmcia_modify_window()
+	pcmcia_set_event_mask()
+	pcmcia_get_first_window()
+	pcmcia_get_next_window()
+
+* device list iteration upon module removal (as of 2.6.10)
+   It is no longer necessary to iterate on the driver's internal
+   client list and call the ->detach() function upon module removal.
+
+* Resource management. (as of 2.6.8)
+   Although the PCMCIA subsystem will allocate resources for cards,
+   it no longer marks these resources busy. This means that driver
+   authors are now responsible for claiming your resources as per
+   other drivers in Linux. You should use request_region() to mark
+   your IO regions in-use, and request_mem_region() to mark your
+   memory regions in-use. The name argument should be a pointer to
+   your driver name. Eg, for pcnet_cs, name should point to the
+   string "pcnet_cs".
+
+* CardServices is gone
+  CardServices() in 2.4 is just a big switch statement to call various
+  services.  In 2.6, all of those entry points are exported and called
+  directly (except for pcmcia_report_error(), just use cs_error() instead).
+
+* struct pcmcia_driver
+  You need to use struct pcmcia_driver and pcmcia_{un,}register_driver
+  instead of {un,}register_pccard_driver

Documentation/power/kernel_threads.txt

@@ -12,8 +12,7 @@ refrigerator. Code to do this looks like this:
 	do {
 		hub_events();
 		wait_event_interruptible(khubd_wait, !list_empty(&hub_event_list));
-		if (current->flags & PF_FREEZE)
-			refrigerator(PF_FREEZE);
+		try_to_freeze();
 	} while (!signal_pending(current));
 
 from drivers/usb/core/hub.c::hub_thread()

Documentation/power/pci.txt

@@ -291,6 +291,44 @@ a request to enable wake events from D3, two calls should be made to
 pci_enable_wake (one for both D3hot and D3cold).
 
 
+A reference implementation
+-------------------------
+.suspend()
+{
+	/* driver specific operations */
+
+	/* Disable IRQ */
+	free_irq();
+	/* If using MSI */
+	pci_disable_msi();
+
+	pci_save_state();
+	pci_enable_wake();
+	/* Disable IO/bus master/irq router */
+	pci_disable_device();
+	pci_set_power_state(pci_choose_state());
+}
+
+.resume()
+{
+	pci_set_power_state(PCI_D0);
+	pci_restore_state();
+	/* device's irq possibly is changed, driver should take care */
+	pci_enable_device();
+	pci_set_master();
+
+	/* if using MSI, device's vector possibly is changed */
+	pci_enable_msi();
+
+	request_irq();
+	/* driver specific operations; */
+}
+
+This is a typical implementation. Drivers can slightly change the order
+of the operations in the implementation, ignore some operations or add
+more deriver specific operations in it, but drivers should do something like
+this on the whole.
+
 5. Resources
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~
 

Documentation/power/swsusp.txt

@@ -164,11 +164,11 @@ place where the thread is safe to be frozen (no kernel semaphores
 should be held at that point and it must be safe to sleep there), and
 add:
 
-            if (current->flags & PF_FREEZE)
-                    refrigerator(PF_FREEZE);
+       try_to_freeze();
 
 If the thread is needed for writing the image to storage, you should
-instead set the PF_NOFREEZE process flag when creating the thread.
+instead set the PF_NOFREEZE process flag when creating the thread (and
+be very carefull).
 
 
 Q: What is the difference between between "platform", "shutdown" and
@@ -233,3 +233,81 @@ A: Try running
 cat `cat /proc/[0-9]*/maps | grep / | sed 's:.* /:/:' | sort -u` > /dev/null
 
 after resume. swapoff -a; swapon -a may also be usefull.
+
+Q: What happens to devices during swsusp? They seem to be resumed
+during system suspend?
+
+A: That's correct. We need to resume them if we want to write image to
+disk. Whole sequence goes like
+
+      Suspend part
+      ~~~~~~~~~~~~
+      running system, user asks for suspend-to-disk
+
+      user processes are stopped
+
+      suspend(PMSG_FREEZE): devices are frozen so that they don't interfere
+      		      with state snapshot
+
+      state snapshot: copy of whole used memory is taken with interrupts disabled
+
+      resume(): devices are woken up so that we can write image to swap
+
+      write image to swap
+
+      suspend(PMSG_SUSPEND): suspend devices so that we can power off
+
+      turn the power off
+
+      Resume part
+      ~~~~~~~~~~~
+      (is actually pretty similar)
+
+      running system, user asks for suspend-to-disk
+
+      user processes are stopped (in common case there are none, but with resume-from-initrd, noone knows)
+
+      read image from disk
+
+      suspend(PMSG_FREEZE): devices are frozen so that they don't interfere
+      		      with image restoration
+
+      image restoration: rewrite memory with image
+
+      resume(): devices are woken up so that system can continue
+
+      thaw all user processes
+
+Q: What is this 'Encrypt suspend image' for?
+
+A: First of all: it is not a replacement for dm-crypt encrypted swap.
+It cannot protect your computer while it is suspended. Instead it does
+protect from leaking sensitive data after resume from suspend.
+
+Think of the following: you suspend while an application is running
+that keeps sensitive data in memory. The application itself prevents
+the data from being swapped out. Suspend, however, must write these
+data to swap to be able to resume later on. Without suspend encryption
+your sensitive data are then stored in plaintext on disk.  This means
+that after resume your sensitive data are accessible to all
+applications having direct access to the swap device which was used
+for suspend. If you don't need swap after resume these data can remain
+on disk virtually forever. Thus it can happen that your system gets
+broken in weeks later and sensitive data which you thought were
+encrypted and protected are retrieved and stolen from the swap device.
+To prevent this situation you should use 'Encrypt suspend image'.
+
+During suspend a temporary key is created and this key is used to
+encrypt the data written to disk. When, during resume, the data was
+read back into memory the temporary key is destroyed which simply
+means that all data written to disk during suspend are then
+inaccessible so they can't be stolen later on.  The only thing that
+you must then take care of is that you call 'mkswap' for the swap
+partition used for suspend as early as possible during regular
+boot. This asserts that any temporary key from an oopsed suspend or
+from a failed or aborted resume is erased from the swap device.
+
+As a rule of thumb use encrypted swap to protect your data while your
+system is shut down or suspended. Additionally use the encrypted
+suspend image to prevent sensitive data from being stolen after
+resume.